Panasonic DC ZS70 DMC Owner’s Manual For Advanced Features Adv En Om

User Manual: panasonic DMC-ZS70 - Owner’s Manual for Advanced Features Free User Guide for Panasonic Camera, Manual - page1

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 302 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Finding the information you need
How to use this manual
Contents
Contents by Function
Before Use
Preparations
Basics
Recording mode
Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
4K Photo and Drive Settings
Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Recording motion pictures
Playing Back and Editing Pictures
Using Menu Functions
- Menu list
Wi-Fi
Connecting with other devices
Others

Owner’s Manual

for advanced features

Digital Camera

Model No. DC-ZS70

DVQP1285ZA

M0517KZ0

Message displays →283

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

Q&A Troubleshooting →285

Finding the information you need →2

Contents →5

Contents by Function →11

Menu list →168

http://shop.panasonic.com/support

(U.S. customers only)

2DVQP1285

Finding the information you need

In this “Owner’s Manual for advanced features”, you can find the information you need

from the following pages.

By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the

information.

Search from “Contents” 5 -

Search from the list of function

names

“Contents by Function”

11 -

Search from “Names and

Functions of Main Parts” 17 -

Search from “List of monitor/

viewfinder displays” 277 -

Search from the list of

on-screen messages

“Message displays”

283 -

Search from the menu list

“Menu list” 168 -

[Rec] ............................ 168

[Motion Picture]............ 184

[Custom] ...................... 186

[Setup] ........................ 196

[Playback] .................... 204

Search from “Q&A

Troubleshooting” 285 -

For details on how to use this manual,

see the next page.

Wi-Fi® function →224

3DVQP1285

How to use this manual

Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.

Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.

Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.

Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.

Recording mode icons

Recording mode:

In Recording modes that show icons in black, you can select and execute indicated

menus and functions.

(Custom Mode) has different functions depending on the recording mode that is

registered.

• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.

4DVQP1285

How to use this manual

■About the symbols in the text

Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.

Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.

Tips for skillful use and points for recording.

(→00) Indicates the reference page. Click to go to the corresponding page.

Click to view the description on the next page.

Steps for setting a menu item are described as follows:

Example: To change the [Quality] setting to [ ] in the [Rec] menu

→ [Rec] → [Quality] → [ ]

• This Owner’s Manual express the up, down, left, and right of the cursor

button as .

• Ring, dial and lever operations are illustrated as below.

Turn the control ring

Rotate the control dial

Rotate the zoom lever

5DVQP1285

Contents

■

Finding the information you need ..... 2

■

How to use this manual ...................... 3

■

Before use ......................................... 14

■

Standard Accessories ...................... 16

Before Use

■

Names and Functions

of Main Parts ..................................... 17

Preparations

■

Attaching the Hand Strap ................. 19

■

Charging battery ............................... 20

Inserting the battery ...................................21

Charging the battery ..................................22

■

Inserting and removing the card

(optional) ............................................ 26

■

About the Card .................................. 27

Formatting the card (initialization)..............28

Estimated recording capacity

(number of pictures/recording time) ........... 28

■

Setting the clock ............................... 30

Changing time settings ..............................31

■

Contents by Function ....................... 11

■

Holding the camera ........................... 32

■

Adjusting the angle

of the monitor .................................... 33

■

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers

Used for Recording ........................... 34

[LVF] button

(Recording pictures using the viewfinder)

... 34

Zoom Lever (Use Zoom)............................35

Shutter button (Taking pictures) ................. 36

Motion picture button

(Recording motion pictures).......................37

Mode dial (Select the recording mode) ...... 37

Control ring / Control dial ........................... 38

Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button

(Selecting/setting items) ............................39

[DISP.] button

(Switching the display information) ............ 39

Basics

■

Touch screen (Touch operations).... 42

Touching the screen and recording

(Touch Shutter function).............................43

Easily Optimizing the Brightness for a

Specified Area ([Touch AE]) .......................44

■

Setting the menu ............................... 45

■

Calling frequently-used

menus instantly

(Quick Menu) ..................................... 47

■

Assigning frequently

used functions to the buttons

(Function buttons) ............................ 48

Using the function buttons during

recording .................................................... 49

Using the function buttons during

playback.....................................................50

■

Changing the settings assigned to

the control ring/control dial ............. 51

■

Entering Text ..................................... 52

6DVQP1285

Contents

Recording mode

■

Taking pictures with

automatic settings

(Intelligent Auto Mode) ..................... 53

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot]) ............................55

Combining pictures into a single still

picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]) ............ 56

Setting coloring ..........................................56

Setting brightness (exposure)/

blurriness of the background

(Defocus control function) .......................... 57

■

Taking Pictures of Yourself

[Self Shot] .......................................... 58

Taking pictures of yourself in

Panorama Shot Mode ................................ 62

Taking pictures of yourself in

4K Photo Mode (4K Selfie) ........................64

■

Taking pictures after

automatically setting the

aperture value and shutter speed

(Program AE Mode)........................... 66

■

Taking pictures by setting the

aperture value and shutter speed ... 67

Taking pictures by setting the aperture

value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode) .............67

Taking pictures by setting the shutter

speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode) ..............68

Taking pictures by setting the

aperture value and shutter speed

(Manual Exposure Mode) ..........................69

Checking the effects of the

aperture value and shutter speed

(Preview Mode)..........................................70

Easily set aperture value /

shutter speed for suitable exposure

(One Push AE) ........................................... 71

■

Recording panorama pictures

(Panorama Shot Mode) ..................... 72

■

Taking pictures

according to the scene

(Scene Guide Mode) ......................... 75

Types of Scene Guide Mode .....................76

■

Taking Pictures with

different picture effects

(Creative Control Mode) ................... 79

Types of picture effects .............................. 80

■

Recording motion pictures

by setting the aperture/

shutter speed/ISO sensitivity

(Creative Video Mode) ...................... 85

Recording Slow Motion Pictures

([High Speed Video]) .................................86

Minimizing operational sounds

during motion picture recording

([Silent Operation]).....................................87

■

Registering your own

settings and recording

(Custom Mode) .................................. 88

Registering your own settings

([Cust.Set Mem.]).......................................88

Recording using registered custom set .....89

7DVQP1285

Contents

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

■

Taking pictures with Auto Focus ..... 90

Set the focusing operation to be

performed when the shutter button is

pressed halfway (AFS, AFF, AFC) .............91

Switching [AF Mode] .................................. 92

Changing the position and size of the

AF area ......................................................98

Setting the AF area position with the

touch pad .................................................101

Optimizing the focus and brightness

for a touched position ..............................102

■

Taking close-up pictures

(Macro recording) ........................... 103

■

Taking pictures with

Manual Focus .................................. 104

■

Taking pictures by locking

the focus and/or exposure

(AF/AE Lock) ................................... 106

■

Taking pictures with

Exposure Compensation ................ 107

■

Setting the ISO Sensitivity ............. 108

■

Adjusting the White Balance ......... 110

4K Photo and Drive Settings

■

Recording with the 4K Photo

function and selecting pictures

to save .............................................. 114

Recording with the 4K Photo function ..... 114

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file and

saving ...................................................... 117

Notes on the 4K Photo function ............... 121

■

Adjusting the focus after recording

([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking]) .... 124

Recording using [Post Focus] .................. 124

Select the focus point and save the

picture ([Post Focus])...............................126

Select the focus range to combine

and create a single picture

([Focus Stacking]) .................................... 127

Notes on the [Post Focus]/

[Focus Stacking] ......................................128

■

Selecting a Drive Mode ................... 129

Burst function ........................................... 130

Taking pictures with self-timer..................132

■

Taking Pictures While Adjusting

a Setting Automatically

(Bracket Recording) ........................ 133

Exposure Bracket ....................................134

■

Taking pictures

automatically at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot] ........................... 135

■

Creating stop motion animation

[Stop Motion Animation] ................ 137

8DVQP1285

Contents

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

■

Correcting jitter ............................... 140

■

Using Zoom ..................................... 142

Zoom types and use ................................142

Using the zoom by performing touch

operations (Touch zoom) .........................145

■

Taking pictures with flash .............. 146

Changing Flash Mode..............................146

Adjusting the flash output ........................148

Recording motion pictures

■

Recording Motion Picture/

4K Motion Picture ........................... 149

Setting the format, picture size and

recording frame rate ................................151

Adjusting the focus while recording

motion pictures ([Continuous AF]) ...........153

■

Pan or zoom while recording

with the camera in a fixed position

[4K Live Cropping] .......................... 154

■

Taking still pictures while

a motion picture is being

recorded ........................................... 157

■

Recording Snap Movies ................. 158

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

■

Viewing your pictures ..................... 161

■

Viewing motion pictures ................ 162

Capturing still pictures from motion

pictures ....................................................163

■

Switching the Playback Method .... 164

Zooming in and viewing

“Playback Zoom”......................................164

Viewing a list of pictures

“Multi Playback” .......................................164

Viewing pictures by their recording date

“Calendar Playback” ................................165

■

Viewing group pictures .................. 166

■

Deleting pictures ............................. 167

9DVQP1285

Contents

Wi-Fi

■

What you can do with the

Wi-Fi® function ................................ 224

■

Wi-Fi Function ................................. 225

■

Operating the camera by

connecting it to a smartphone ....... 228

Installing the smartphone/tablet app

“Panasonic Image App” ...........................228

Connecting to a smartphone....................229

Taking pictures via a smartphone

(remote recording) ...................................233

Playing back pictures in the camera

on a smartphone ...................................... 234

Saving pictures in the camera to a

smartphone .............................................. 234

Sending pictures in the camera to

social networking services .......................235

Adding location information to pictures

in the camera from a smartphone ............ 235

Combining motion pictures recorded

with Snap Movie according to your

preference on a smartphone....................237

■

Displaying still pictures on a TV .... 238

■

Sending pictures ............................. 239

■

Sending pictures to a

smartphone ..................................... 242

■

Wireless printing ............................. 243

■

Sending pictures to AV device ....... 244

■

Sending pictures to a PC ............... 245

■

Using WEB services ....................... 247

When sending images to WEB service....247

When sending images to

[Cloud Sync. Service] ..............................250

■

Using “LUMIX CLUB” ..................... 251

About the [LUMIX CLUB] ......................... 251

■

About connections ......................... 255

Connecting via a wireless access point

([Via Network]) .........................................256

Connecting directly ([Direct]) ...................258

Connecting quickly with the same

settings as used previously

([Select a destination from History] /

[Select a destination from Favorite]) ........ 259

■

[Wi-Fi Setup] .................................... 261

Using Menu Functions

■

Menu list .......................................... 168

[Rec] ........................................................168

[Motion Picture] ........................................ 184

[Custom] ..................................................186

[Setup] .....................................................196

[Playback] ................................................204

10 DVQP1285

Contents

Connecting with other devices

■

Enjoying 4K motion pictures ......... 262

Viewing 4K motion pictures .....................262

Storing 4K motion pictures.......................263

■

Viewing on TV screen ..................... 264

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™) ....266

■

Storing recorded still pictures

and motion pictures on your PC ... 267

Downloading software .............................268

Copying still pictures and motion

pictures ....................................................270

■

Storing recorded still pictures

and motion pictures in the

recorder ........................................... 272

■

Printing ............................................ 273

Printing with date and text .......................275

Others

■

Optional accessories ...................... 276

AC adaptor (optional) /

DC coupler (optional) ............................... 276

■

List of monitor/viewfinder

displays ............................................ 277

■

Message displays ........................... 283

■

Q&A

Troubleshooting .............................. 285

■

Usage cautions and notes ............. 294

11 DVQP1285

Contents by Function

Recording

Recording mode ...........................................37

Self Shot Mode .............................................58

[Preview] ....................................................... 70

Panorama Shot Mode ...................................72

Macro recording ..........................................103

[Time Lapse Shot] .......................................135

[Stop Motion Animation] ..............................137

[Silent Mode] ...............................................186

4K Photo

[4K PHOTO]................................................ 114

[Post Focus] recording ................................124

Focus (AF/MF)

Auto Focus ...................................................90

AF Mode .......................................................92

Adjusting the AF area position ...................... 98

Manual Focus .............................................104

AF/AE Lock .................................................106

Drive

Drive Mode .................................................129

Burst function ..............................................130

[Self Timer] .................................................132

Recording

Exposure

[Touch AE] ....................................................44

[One Push AE] ..............................................71

AF/AE Lock .................................................106

Exposure Compensation ............................107

ISO sensitivity ............................................. 108

Exposure Bracket .......................................134

[Metering Mode] ..........................................174

Picture Quality and Color Tone

White Balance ............................................ 110

[Photo Style] ...............................................169

[Filter Settings] ............................................171

[Picture Size] ..............................................173

[Quality] ......................................................173

[i.Dynamic] .................................................. 175

[i.Resolution] ............................................... 175

[HDR] .......................................................... 176

[Diffraction Compensation] .........................179

Flash

[Flash Mode] ............................................... 146

[Flash Adjust.] .............................................148

Motion Picture

Creative Video Mode ....................................85

[High Speed Video] ....................................... 86

[Silent Operation] .......................................... 87

Motion pictures in 4K ..................................149

[Rec Format] ............................................... 151

[Rec Quality] ...............................................151

[4K Live Cropping] ......................................154

Taking still pictures while a motion picture

is being recorded ........................................157

[Snap Movie] ...............................................158

Motion Picture

Audio

[Wind Noise Canceller] ...............................185

Screen settings

[Center Marker] ...........................................191

[Zebra Pattern] ............................................192

[Monochrome Live View] ............................192

12 DVQP1285

Contents by Function

Playback

Picture playback .........................................161

Motion picture playback .............................. 162

Playback Zoom ........................................... 164

Multi Playback ............................................164

Delete .........................................................167

[Auto Review] .............................................194

Display/playback settings

[Slide Show] ................................................205

[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ........................219, 220

Edit

[Post Focus] ................................................126

[Focus Stacking] .........................................127

[Beauty Retouch] ........................................208

[RAW Processing] .......................................210

[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] ...........................212

[Light Composition] ..................................... 213

[Clear Retouch] ...........................................214

[Resize] ....................................................... 218

[Cropping] ...................................................219

Playback

Adding information

[Location Logging] ......................................207

[Title Edit] .................................................... 215

[Text Stamp] ................................................ 216

Image settings

[Favorite] .....................................................220

[Print Set] .................................................... 221

[Protect] ......................................................222

Basic settings

[Format] ........................................................28

[Clock Set] ....................................................30

Diopter adjustment .......................................34

Display switching ....................................39, 41

How to set menu items .................................45

[Q.MENU] .....................................................47

[Beep] .........................................................198

[Economy] ...................................................200

[Reset] (initialization) ..................................203

Setup/Custom

Customization

Function buttons ...........................................48

Custom Mode ...............................................88

[Custom] menu ...........................................186

13 DVQP1285

Contents by Function

Transferring images to a PC ....................... 267

PHOTOfunSTUDIO ....................................268

SILKYPIX ....................................................269

Playing back pictures on a TV screen ........264

[VIERA Link] ...............................................266

Connecting with other devices

Recorder

Dubbing ......................................................272

Printer

PictBridge ...................................................273

Connect

“Image App” ................................................228

[WPS (Push-Button)] ..........................256, 258

Direct connection ........................................ 258

Image App

Remote recording .......................................233

Saving images ............................................234

Sending images .................................. 235, 242

Sending and adding location information ...235

Combining motion pictures recorded with

[Snap Movie] ...............................................237

Wi-Fi

In combination with other devices

Playing back pictures on a TV ....................238

Printing images ........................................... 243

Sending images to an AV device ................244

Sending images to a PC ............................. 245

Sending images to a WEB service .............247

Using [Cloud Sync. Service] .......................250

14 DVQP1285

Before Use

Before use

■Camera handling

Keep the camera away from excessive vibration, force, or pressure.

●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which may damage the lens,

monitor, viewfinder, or camera body.

This may also cause the camera to malfunction or prevent recording.

• Dropping or hitting the camera against a hard surface

• Sitting down with the camera in your pants pocket or forcing it into a full bag

• Adding accessories to the camera strap

• Pushing with excessive force on the lens or monitor

The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or waterproof.

Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand, or where water can

come into contact with the camera.

●Avoid using the camera under the following conditions, which present a risk that sand,

water, or foreign material may enter the camera through the lens or openings around

buttons. Be especially careful because these conditions may damage the camera, and

such damage may not be repairable.

• In extremely dusty or sandy places

• In the rain or by the shore, where the camera may be exposed to water

■Condensation (When the lens, the monitor, or viewfinder, is fogged up)

●Condensation may occur when the camera is exposed to sudden changes of

temperature or humidity. Avoid these conditions, which may make the lens, monitor, or

viewfinder dirty, cause mold, or damage the camera.

●If condensation does occur, turn off the camera and wait about two hours before using

it. Once the camera adjusts to the surrounding temperature, the fogging will clear

naturally.

15 DVQP1285

Before Use

Before use

■Always take a test shot first

Before important events when you will use the camera (at weddings, for example), always

take a test shot to make sure that pictures and sound record correctly.

■No compensation for missed shots

We cannot compensate for missed shots if technical problems with the camera or card

prevent recording.

■Carefully observe copyright laws

Unauthorized use of recordings that contain works with copyright for purposes other than

personal use is prohibited under copyright law. Recording of certain material may be

restricted even for the purpose of personal use.

■Also refer to “Usage cautions and notes” (→294)

■Before using the camera, make sure all accessories specified in the attached

“Basic Owner’s Manual” are supplied.

For details on the optional accessories, refer to (→276) or “Basic Owner’s Manual”.

16 DVQP1285

Before Use

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

●The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the

camera was purchased.

For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Owner’s Manual”.

●Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.

●SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card

in the text.

●Cards are optional.

●Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.

●Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.

■Optional accessories (→276)

17 DVQP1285

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

1Shutter button (→36)

2Zoom lever (→35, 142, 194)

3Motion picture button (→37, 149)

4Camera [ON/OFF] button (→30)

5Mode dial (→37)

6Stereo microphone (→32, 185)

Be careful not to cover the microphone

with your finger. Doing so may make

sound difficult to record.

7Viewfinder (→34, 277)

8Diopter adjustment dial (→34)

9Eye sensor (→34)

10 Strap eyelet (→19)

11 Speaker (→32, 198)

12 Control ring (→38, 51)

13 Lens barrel

14 Lens

15 Self-timer indicator (→132) /

AF Assist Lamp (→32, 188)

16 Flash (→32, 146)

1 2 3

7 8 9

121314

18 DVQP1285

Before Use

Names and Functions of Main Parts

10 Strap eyelet (→19)

17 [LVF] button (→34) /

[Fn4] button (→48)

18 Charging lamp (→23) /

Wi-Fi® connection lamp (→225)

19 [ ] ([Post Focus]) button (→124) /

[Fn2] button (→48)

20 Control dial (→38, 51)

21 [Q.MENU/ ] (Cancel) button (→47) /

[ ] (Delete) button (→167) /

[Fn3] button (→48)

22 [ ] (4K photo mode) button (→114) /

[Fn1] button (→48)

23 [ ] (Playback) button (→161)

24 Cursor button (→39)

[ ] (Exposure compensation) ( )

(→107)

[ ] (Flash) ( ) (→146)

[ ] (Drive Mode) ( ) (→129)

[ ] (Focus Mode) ( ) (→90, 103, 104)

25 [MENU/SET] button (→39, 45)

26 [DISP.] button (→39)

27 [HDMI] socket (→264)

28 [USB/CHARGE] socket (→22, 270, 273)

29 Card/Battery door (→21, 26)

30 Release lever (→21, 26)

31 DC coupler cover (→276)

When using an AC adaptor, ensure that

the Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and

AC adaptor (optional) are used.

32 Tripod mount (→297)

Do not attach this unit to tripods that

have screws with a length of 5.5 mm

(0.22 inch) or more. Doing so may

damage this unit or the unit may not be

secured properly on the tripod.

33 Touch screen (→42) /

monitor (→33, 277)

■Function buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9]

• Buttons [Fn5] to [Fn9] (→48) are

touch icons. They can be displayed by

touching the [ ] tab on the recording

screen.

17 10

32 31 30 2933

19 DVQP1285

Preparations

Attaching the Hand Strap

We recommend attaching the hand strap when using the camera to prevent it from

dropping.

Strap eyelet

20 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

Always use the dedicated AC adaptor (supplied), USB connection cable (supplied), and

battery for this camera.

•Always charge before first use! (battery shipped uncharged)

•Charge the battery while it is in the camera.

Camera status Charge

Turn off Yes

Turn on No

About batteries that you can use with this unit

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the

genuine products are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of

these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to

meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility

that these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that

we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a

counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we recommend

that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

21 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

Inserting the battery

To charge the battery, insert it into the camera.

1Slide the release lever to the

[OPEN] position and open the

card/battery door

Release lever

[OPEN] [LOCK]

2Insert the battery all the way

• Insert the battery all the way firmly and

check that it is locked by lever.

3Close the card/battery door

and then slide the release

lever to the [LOCK] position

Make sure to insert the battery in the

correct orientation.

Lever

■To remove battery

Move the lever in the card/battery

compartment in the direction of the arrow.

●Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.

●If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.

●To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes

off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded

data.)

●Remove battery from camera after use.

●The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws.

Call the RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.

22 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

Charging the battery

We recommend charging in a location where the ambient temperature is between 10 °C

and 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) (same for the battery temperature).

Insert the battery into the camera.

Make sure that the camera is turned off.

The battery can be charged from an outlet or through a PC.

USB connection cable (supplied)

AC adaptor (supplied)

To the electrical outlet

Computer

Getting ready: Turn on the computer.

When charging the camera, connect the USB connection cable (supplied) to the

[USB/CHARGE] socket.

[USB/CHARGE] socket

• This terminal is located at the bottom when the camera is in

an upright position.

• Always check the direction of the socket, and hold the plug

straight to insert or remove it. (If the cable is inserted in the

wrong direction, the socket could become deformed and cause

faulty operation.)

Also, do not insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause

damage to this unit.

23 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

●If the computer enters sleep mode during charging, charging may be stopped.

●If a notebook computer that is not connected to an electrical outlet is connected to the camera,

the battery of the notebook computer will be depleted. Do not leave the camera and notebook

connected for a long period of time.

●Always connect the USB connection cable to the USB connector on your computer. Do not

connect the USB connection cable to the USB connector of the monitor, keyboard, printer, or USB

hub.

Charging lamp indications

Charging lamp

On: Charging in progress

Off: Charging complete

(After charging stops, disconnect the camera

from the electrical outlet or your computer.)

Flashing: Charging error

(For instructions on correcting the problem,

refer to (→285).)

24 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

Notes on charging time

When using the AC adaptor (supplied)

Charging time Approx. 190 min.

• The charging time indicated above is the time required for charging in case when the

battery is completely used up. The time required for charging differs depending on

conditions of battery usage. Charging takes longer in cases when temperatures are

either high or low and when the battery has not been used for a long period of time.

• The time required for charging through the computer varies depending on the power

supply capacity of the computer.

●Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Doing so may cause

malfunction of the camera.

●Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.

●Do not use a USB extension cable.

●The AC adaptor (supplied) and the USB connection cable (supplied) are dedicated accessories of

this camera. Do not use them for other devices.

●Remove the battery after use. (The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after

being charged.)

●If there is any trouble related to the electrical outlet (i.e. power failure), charging may not complete

properly. Disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and reconnect it to the camera.

●If the charging lamp does not light even when the camera is connected to the AC adaptor

(supplied) or a computer, check to make sure it is properly connected. (→22)

Remaining battery

60p

Remaining battery (only when using battery)

(flashes red)

If the battery mark flashes red, recharge or replace a fully charged

battery.

25 DVQP1285

Preparations

Charging battery

Estimated number of recordable pictures and operating time

Numbers of recordable still pictures are based on CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products

Association) standards.

When a Panasonic SDHC memory card and the supplied battery are used.

■Recording still pictures (When using monitor)

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures

Recording time Approx. 190 min.

■Recording still pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 250 pictures

Recording time Approx. 125 min.

■Recording motion pictures (When using monitor)

[Rec Format] [AVCHD] [MP4] [MP4]

[Rec Quality] [FHD/17M/60i] [FHD/28M/60p] [4K/100M/30p]

Available recording time Approx. 100 min. Approx. 100 min. Approx. 90 min.

Actual available recording time*Approx. 50 min. Approx. 50 min. Approx. 45 min.

* The time you can actually record when repeating actions such as turning the camera on/off and

starting/stopping recording.

■Viewing pictures (When using monitor)

Playback time Approx. 260 min.

●The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the

environment and the operating conditions.

For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable

pictures is reduced.

• In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

• When operations such as the flash and zoom are used repeatedly.

●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan. Please

purchase a new battery.

26 DVQP1285

Preparations

Inserting and removing the card (optional)

• Make sure that the camera is turned off.

1Slide the release lever to the

[OPEN] position and open the

card/battery door

Release lever

2Insert the card all the way

Do not touch the terminal

• Check the orientation of a card.

• Insert the card all the way firmly until

it clicks.

3Close the card/battery door

and slide the release lever to

the [LOCK] position

[OPEN] [LOCK]

■To remove card

Press the center of the card.

Press Pull out

●Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

●To remove the card, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX indicator on the screen goes

off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to malfunction and may damage the card or recorded

data.)

27 DVQP1285

Preparations

About the Card

The following SD standard-based cards can be used.

Type of Card Capacity Notes

SD Memory Cards 512 MB – 2 GB • This unit is compatible with UHS-Ι UHS Speed Class 3

standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.

• Operation of the cards listed on the left has been

confirmed with Panasonic brand card.

SDHC Memory Cards 4 GB – 32 GB

SDXC Memory Cards 48 GB – 128 GB

■About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings

According to the [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] (→151) of a motion picture, the required

card differs. To record 4K photos, you need a card with a speed class rating that supports

4K photo recording. Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class or

UHS Speed Class.

• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous

writing. Confirm the SD speed by checking the card label or other card related

materials.

[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example

[AVCHD] All Class 4 or higher

[MP4] [FHD]/[HD]

[MP4] [4K]/

[High Speed Video] (→86) UHS Speed Class 3

When recording in 4K Photo /

[Post Focus] UHS Speed Class 3

• Latest information:

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

Access to the card

The access indication displays red when pictures are being recorded on the

card.

60p

●While the camera is accessing the card (for an operation such as picture writing, reading, deletion,

or formatting), do not turn off the camera or remove the battery, card, AC adaptor (optional) or DC

coupler (optional). Do not subject the camera to vibrations, impact, or static electricity. The card or

the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate normally. If operation

fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again.

●If you set the write-protect switch to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, delete

or format the data or display it by recording date.

●It is recommended that you copy important pictures to your computer

(as electromagnetic waves, static electricity, or faults may cause data to be

damaged).

28 DVQP1285

Preparations

About the Card

Formatting the card (initialization)

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary

data in advance.

→ [Setup] → [Format]

●This requires a sufficiently charged battery, or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.

●Always format cards with this camera. Please reformat the card with this camera if it has already

been formatted with a computer or another device.

Estimated recording capacity (number of pictures/recording time)

The number of pictures you can take and the recording time vary in proportion to card

capacity (and depending on recording conditions and type of card).

Recording picture capacity (still pictures)

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

L (20M) 1450 2910 5810 11510

M (10M) 2630 5280 10510 20810

S (5M) 4600 9220 17640 34940

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3] and [Quality] is set to [ ]

[Picture Size] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

L (20M) 450 900 1810 3590

M (10M) 520 1050 2110 4180

S (5M) 570 1150 2290 4550

●When the number of recordable pictures exceeds 9,999, “9999+” is displayed.

29 DVQP1285

Preparations

About the Card

Recording time capacity (motion pictures)

• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been

recorded.

([h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.)

When [Rec Format] is [AVCHD]

[Rec Quality] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

[FHD/28M/60p] 1h15m 2h30m 5h00m 9h55m

[FHD/17M/60i] 2h00m 4h05m 8h15m 16h25m

[FHD/24M/30p] 1h25m 2h55m 5h50m 11h35m

When [Rec Format] is [MP4]

[Rec Quality] 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

[4K/100M/30p] 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h45m

[FHD/28M/60p] 1h10m 2h30m 5h00m 9h55m

[FHD/20M/30p] 1h35m 3h20m 6h40m 13h15m

[HD/10M/30p] 3h05m 6h20m 12h45m 25h25m

●[AVCHD] motion pictures:

Files are split into smaller motion picture files for recording when the file size exceeds 4 GB.

• Motion pictures with [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD/28M/60p]/[FHD/17M/60i]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

●MP4 motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] size of [FHD] or [HD]:

Files are split into smaller motion picture files for recording and playback when the file size

exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue to record motion pictures without interruption.)

• Motion pictures with [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD/28M/60p]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

●MP4 motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]:

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.

When using an SDHC memory card, files are split into smaller motion picture files for recording

and playback if the file size exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue to record motion pictures without

interruption.)

If using an SDXC memory card, you can record a motion picture in a single file even if the size is

greater than 4 GB.

●The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.

30 DVQP1285

Preparations

Setting the clock

The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

1Press the Camera [ON/OFF] button

• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed

to step 4.

2Press [MENU/SET] while the message is displayed

3Press to select the language, and press [MENU/SET]

• The [Please set the clock] message appears.

4Press [MENU/SET]

5Press to select the items (year,

month, day, hour, minute), and press

to set

: Home time

: Destination time

Style

Display order

Time display format

■To set the display order or time display format

Select [Style] and press [MENU/SET] to display the

setting screen for display order and time display format.

6Press [MENU/SET]

31 DVQP1285

Preparations

Setting the clock

7When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed,

press [MENU/SET]

8When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press

[MENU/SET]

9Press to set your home area and

press [MENU/SET]

City or area name

Current time

Difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)

●If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you order a photo studio to print the

picture, or when you stamp the date on the pictures with [Text Stamp].

Changing time settings

1Select [Clock Set] from the [Setup] menu

• For details about how to set the menu (→45)

2Set the date and time (Perform steps 5 - 6. (→30))

●Clock settings will be saved for approx. 3 months even after the battery is removed, provided a

fully charged battery was installed in the camera for 24 hours beforehand.

32 DVQP1285

Basics

Holding the camera

Hold the camera gently with both hands keeping your arms close to your body

while standing with your feet slightly apart.

•To prevent dropping, be sure to attach the supplied strap and fit it to your wrist.

•Do not block the flash, AF Assist Lamp, microphone, or speaker with your fingers

or other objects.

• Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed.

• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person

or object in the vicinity while taking pictures.

Flash/AF Assist Lamp

Microphone

Hand strap

Speaker

■About the direction detect function

Still pictures recorded with the camera held vertically can be

automatically displayed in portrait orientation during playback.

(Only when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)

• The direction detect function may not operate correctly if

pictures are taken with the camera pointing up or down.

• Motion pictures, 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo

function, and pictures recorded in [Post Focus] cannot be

displayed vertically.

33 DVQP1285

Basics

Adjusting the angle of the monitor

You can adjust the angle of the monitor.

•Be careful not to catch your finger, etc. in the monitor.

•When rotating the angle of the monitor, be careful not to

apply too much force. Doing so may cause damage or

malfunction.

(Open and close with your finger on point .)

• When not using this camera, close the monitor completely

back to the original position.

Recording from a variety of angles

The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as it allows you to take

pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.

Taking pictures of yourself Taking pictures at low angle

• If you rotate the monitor as shown in the

figure, the camera will switch to Self Shot

Mode. (→58)

34 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

[LVF] button (Recording pictures using the viewfinder)

1Press [LVF] button

Eye Sensor

[LVF] button

You can switch between monitor display and Viewfinder display.

Automatic switching

between viewfinder and

monitor

Viewfinder display Monitor display

■Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor

The eye sensor automatically switches the display to viewfinder when your eye or an

object moves close to the viewfinder. When the eye or object moves away from the

viewfinder, the camera returns to monitor display.

• When [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], the camera adjusts the

focus automatically as the eye sensor is activated. Even when [Eye Sensor AF] is set

and the camera automatically adjusts the focus, a beep will not sound.

■About diopter adjustment

Rotate the diopter adjustment dial to adjust until you are able

to clearly see the characters displayed in the viewfinder.

●When you open the monitor, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and the

[LVF] button and eye sensor are disabled.

●The eye sensor may react depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you hold the

camera, or whether the eye sensor is exposed to strong light.

●During motion picture playback or Slide Show, the eye sensor does not operate.

35 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Setting the sensitivity of the eye sensor or setting to switch the display

between the viewfinder and monitor

→ [Custom] → [Eye Sensor]

[Sensitivity] Use this setting to set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

[LVF/Monitor Switch]

Use this setting to switch the display between the viewfinder and monitor.

[LVF/MON AUTO] (Automatic switching between viewfinder and monitor) /

[LVF] (Viewfinder display) / [MON] (Monitor display)

• After the display is switched using the [LVF] button, the setting of [LVF/

Monitor Switch] will also change.

Zoom Lever (Use Zoom)

You can adjust the area of a picture to be taken using the zoom or control ring.

• You can also use the zoom function from the touch panel. (→145)

• For details about zoom types and use, refer to (→142).

Zoom lever Control ring

1Move the zoom lever 1Turn the control ring*

* You can perform zoom operation by assigning

the [Zoom] setting to the control ring. (→51)

T side: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject

W side: Wide-angle, Capture a wider area

Turning angle is large: Zoom speed is high

Turning angle is small: Zoom speed is low

Clockwise: Telephoto, Enlarge the subject

Counterclockwise: Wide-angle, Capture a wider

area

●Do not touch the lens barrel during zooming.

●Adjust the focus after adjusting the zoom.

●The camera may make a rattling noise and vibrate when the zoom lever or control ring is

operated. This is not a malfunction.

36 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Shutter button (Taking pictures)

1Press the shutter button halfway (press lightly) to

focus on the subject

Focus display

( When focus is aligned: illuminated

When focus is not aligned: flashing)

Aperture value

Shutter speed

• The aperture value and shutter speed are displayed. (If the

aperture value and shutter speed are shown in red and flashing,

you do not have the appropriate exposure, unless you are using

the flash.)

2Press the shutter button fully (push the button all the

way), and take the picture

●Pictures can be taken only when the image is correctly focused as long as the [Focus/

Release Priority] (→188) is set to [FOCUS].

●When [Live View Mode] (→198) is set to [ECO 30fps], Digital Zoom is not available.

●Even during menu operation or picture playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you can

instantly set the camera ready for recording.

■Focus range

Focus range is displayed when operating the zoom

Focus range

• The focus range is displayed in red when it is not focused

after pressing the shutter button halfway.

The focus range may change gradually depending on the zoom position.

37 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)

1Press the motion picture button to start recording

• Immediately release the motion picture button after pressing it.

2Press the motion picture button again to end recording

Mode dial (Select the recording mode)

1Set to the desired recording mode

•Rotate the mode dial slowly to select the desired mode.

Intelligent Auto Mode (→53)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (→53)

Program AE Mode (→66)

Aperture-Priority AE Mode (→67)

Shutter-Priority AE Mode (→68)

Manual Exposure Mode (→69)

Creative Video Mode (→85)

Custom Mode (→88)

Panorama Shot Mode (→72)

Scene Guide Mode (→75)

Creative Control Mode (→79)

38 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Control ring / Control dial

You can select menu items etc. by rotating the control dial.

You can use the control ring ( )/control dial ( ) to change the settings for recording.

Following are the pre-assigned settings.

Mode dial Control ring*1 Control dial

Step Zoom (→194) —

Program Shift (→66)

Aperture adjustment (→67)

Shutter speed adjustment (→68)

Aperture adjustment*2 (→69) Shutter speed adjustment*2 (→69)

Aperture adjustment*3 / Shutter speed adjustment*3

Picture effects change

Aperture adjustment*4 / Shutter speed adjustment*5

Picture effects change (→79)

*1 When Manual Focus is set, the control ring is assigned to focus adjustment. (→104)

*2 Press to switch between shutter speed adjustment and aperture adjustment.

*3 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [P], [A], [S], or [M], you can change the aperture value and shutter

speed in the same way as when the mode dial is set to [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] (except Program

Shift Mode).

*4 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Appetizing Food].

*5 The operation is possible only when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Artistic Nightscape].

The control ring/control dial can be used to change to your preferred settings. (→51)

39 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

Cursor button / [MENU/SET] button (Selecting/setting items)

Pressing the cursor button:

Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.

Pressing [MENU/SET]:

Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.

[DISP.] button (Switching the display information)

1Press [DISP.] button to switch the display

• If the information on the screen is not displayed any longer

because no operation was performed for some time, press the

[DISP.] button or touch the screen to display the information

again.

During recording

You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.

→ [Custom] → [LVF Disp.Style] / [Monitor Disp. Style]

Settings: [ ] (Live View Finder style display layout) /

[ ] (Monitor style display layout)

■[ ] Live View Finder style display layout (Example of viewfinder style display)

With information

(Detailed information) With information

With information

(Detailed information)

level gauge

With information

level gauge

60p60p

40 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

■[ ] Monitor style display layout (Example of monitor style display)

With information Without information

With information

level gauge

Without information

level gauge

60p60p

Turned off

■Using the level gauge

If you want to make sure that the camera is not slanted or tilted, for example, when you

take a picture of a landscape, use the level gauge indication as a reference.

The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the camera so that it

matches the white line.

Tilting up or down

• In this case, it is facing upward.

Tilting left or right

• In this case, the right side has

dropped.

• When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.

●Even when angle is more or less corrected, there may be an error of about ±1 degree.

●The level gauge may not be displayed correctly or the direction detect function (→32) may not

operate correctly if the pictures are taken with the camera pointing sharply up or down.

41 DVQP1285

Basics

Buttons/Ring/Dials/Levers Used for Recording

During playback

With information

Detailed information

display Histogram display

Without information

([Highlight])*

100-0001

AM10:00 DEC. 1.2017

100-00011/98

Without information

* This screen is displayed only when [Highlight] (→191) in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].

●Some screens cannot be displayed during playback of certain files, for example motion picture

and 4K burst files.

42 DVQP1285

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Touch screen of this unit is capacitive. Touch the panel directly with your bare finger.

Touch

To touch and release the touch screen.

Drag

To touch and slide your finger across the touch screen.

Pinch (spread/pinch)

On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to

zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out.

●Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.

●If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions that

accompany the sheet. (Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)

●The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.

• When touched by a gloved hand

• When the touch screen is wet

43 DVQP1285

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Touching the screen and recording (Touch Shutter function)

Recording mode:

This function enables you to focus and record still pictures simply by touching the

subjects that appear on the screen.

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The icon changes to [ ] and you can now proceed with touch

shutter recording.

3Touch the subject you want to record

■To release the touch shutter function

Touch [ ]

●If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.

44 DVQP1285

Basics

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Easily Optimizing the Brightness for a Specified Area

([Touch AE])

Recording mode:

You can easily optimize the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the

subject appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The setting screen for the brightness optimization position is

displayed.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively for the

[Touch AE].

3Touch the subject you want to optimize the brightness

for

• Touching [Reset] will bring the brightness optimization position

back to the center.

SetSet

Reset

4Touch [Set]

■Canceling the [Touch AE] function

Touch [ ]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using the Digital Zoom

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

• When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu has been set to [AF+AE] (→102)

45 DVQP1285

Basics

Setting the menu

You can use the menu to set camera and recording functions, operate playback functions,

and perform other operations.

• Menu settings can be made either by button or touch operation.

1Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu

[Rec]

(→168)

You can perform settings for the aspect ratio, number of pixels, 4K

Photo, etc.

[Motion Picture]

(→184)

You can select the recording format and picture quality and other

settings.

[Custom]

(→186)

Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and button

operations, can be set up according to your preferences.

[Setup]

(→196)

You can perform settings that make usage more convenient, such

as the changing the clock settings and beep tone. You can also

perform Wi-Fi function-related settings.

[Playback]

(→204)

You can specify picture protection, cropping, print settings, and

other settings for pictures you have taken.

■Switching menu type

Menu type

Press

Press to select a tab such as [ ]

Press [MENU/SET]

With touch screen operations

Touch a tab, such as [ ]

46 DVQP1285

Basics

Setting the menu

2Press to select the menu item and

press [MENU/SET]

Item

Page

• You can switch to the next page by pressing [DISP.]

button or rotating the zoom lever.

With touch screen operations

Touch the menu item

• You can switch to the next page by touching [ ]/[ ].

3Press to select the setting and press

[MENU/SET]

Selected setting

Settings

• The setting methods vary depending on the menu

item.

With touch screen operations

Touch the setting to set

4Press [Q.MENU/ ] button repeatedly

until the recording or playback screen

reappears

• During recording, the menu screen can also be exited

by pressing the shutter button halfway.

With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

●The operations such as selecting menu items can also be made by rotating the control dial.

47 DVQP1285

Basics

Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)

You can easily call some of the menu items and set them during recording.

• Some items or settings cannot be selected depending on the mode or display style the

camera is in.

1Press [Q.MENU/ ] button

2Rotate the control dial to select a menu

item, and press or

• The menu item can also be selected by pressing .

60p

3Rotate the control dial to select the

setting

• The setting can also be selected with .

60p

4Press [Q.MENU/ ] button to close the Quick menu

48 DVQP1285

Basics

You can assign frequently-used functions to particular buttons ([Fn1] - [Fn4]) or icons

displayed on the screen ([Fn5] - [Fn9]).

• Certain functions cannot be assigned to some function buttons.

• The function assigned to the function button may not work in some modes or on some

display screens.

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Custom] → [Fn Button Set]

Settings: [Setting in REC mode] / [Setting in PLAY mode]

2Press to select the function button

you want to assign a function to and

press [MENU/SET]

3Press to select the function you want to assign and press

[MENU/SET]

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode], refer

to (→49).

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode], refer

to (→50).

■Rapidly assigning functions

The assignment screen displayed in Step 3 can be displayed by holding a function button

([Fn1] to [Fn4]) for 2 seconds.

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons

(Function buttons)

49 DVQP1285

Basics

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)

Using the function buttons during recording

Press the function button to use the assigned function.

■Using function buttons with touch operations

Touch [ ]

Touch [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8] or [Fn9]

• [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8] and [Fn9] cannot be used when the

viewfinder is in use.

■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]

[Rec] menu/Recording functions

• [4K Photo Mode] (→114): [Fn1]*

• [Post Focus] (→124): [Fn2]*

• [Wi-Fi] (→225): [Fn5]*

• [Q.MENU] (→47): [Fn3]*

• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→35): [Fn4]*

• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style] (→39)

• [AF/AE LOCK] (→106)

• [AF-ON] (→106)

• [Preview] (→70)

• [One Push AE] (→71)

• [Touch AE] (→44)

• [Level Gauge] (→40): [Fn6]*

• [Focus Area Set]

• [Photo Style] (→169)

• [Filter Effect] (→171)

• [Aspect Ratio] (→172)

• [Picture Size] (→173)

• [Quality] (→173)

• [Sensitivity] (→108)

• [White Balance] (→110)

• [AF Mode] (→92)

• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→91)

• [Metering Mode] (→174)

• [Bracket] (→133)

• [i.Dynamic] (→175)

• [i.Resolution] (→175)

• [HDR] (→176)

• [Shutter Type] (→177)

• [Flash Adjust.] (→148)

• [i.Zoom] (→143)

• [Digital Zoom] (→144)

• [Stabilizer] (→140)

• [Exposure Comp.] (→107)

• [Flash Mode] (→146)

• [Focus Mode] (→90, 103, 104)

• [Drive Mode] (→129)

• [Restore to Default]

[Motion Picture] menu

• [4K Live Cropping] (→154)

• [Snap Movie] (→158): [Fn8]* • [Rec Format] / [Rec Quality] (→151)

[Custom] menu

• [Silent Mode] (→186)

• [Peaking] (→190)

• [Histogram] (→190): [Fn7]*

• [Guide Line] (→191)

• [Zebra Pattern] (→192)

• [Monochrome Live View] (→192)

• [Rec Area] (→193)

• [Zoom lever] (→194)

• [Touch Screen] (→195)

* Function button settings at the time of purchase.

([Fn9] has no function button setting at the time of purchase)

50 DVQP1285

Basics

Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (Function buttons)

●When [Focus Area Set] is assigned to the function button, you can display the AF area or the MF

Assist position setting screen.

●If the screen displays or similar, the displayed operation will be

performed instead of the function assigned to function buttons by

[Fn Button Set].

Using the function buttons during playback

You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function

button during playback.

Example: When [Fn2] is set to [Favorite]

1Press to select the picture

2Press [Fn2] button, and then set the picture as

[Favorite]

■Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]

• The following functions can be assigned to the button [Fn1], [Fn2] or [Fn4].

[Playback] menu/Playback functions

• [Wi-Fi] (→225): [Fn1]*

• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (→35): [Fn4]*

• [Favorite] (→220): [Fn2]*

• [Print Set] (→221)

• [Protect] (→222)

• [Delete Single] (→167)

• [Off]

• [Restore to Default]

* Function button settings at the time of purchase.

51 DVQP1285

Basics

Changing the settings assigned to the control ring/

control dial

Recording mode:

Changes the settings assigned to the control ring/control dial.

→ [Custom] → [Ring/Dial Set]

Settings: [ ] (control ring) / [ ] (control dial)

1Use to select the setting and press [MENU/SET]

[DEFLT] [Normal] [Drive Mode] (→129)

[Zoom]* (→142) [Photo Style] (→169)

[Step Zoom]* (→194) [Filter Effect] (→171)

[Exposure Comp.] (→107) [Aspect Ratio] (→172)

[Sensitivity] (→108) [i.Dynamic] (→175)

[White Balance] (→110)[i.Resolution] (→175)

[AF Mode] (→92) [Flash Mode] (→146)

[Focus Mode] (→90, 103, 104)

[Flash Adjust.] (→148)

[OFF] [Not Set]*

* Items that can only be set to the control ring

• To return to the default setting, select [Normal].

• If you do not use the control ring, select [Not Set].

●The assigned function setting applies to all the recording modes.

However, the assigned function may not operate when combined with certain recording mode.

52 DVQP1285

Basics

Entering Text

1Use to select characters

2Press [MENU/SET] several times until the

desired character is displayed

• [ ]: Enter a blank.

■To change the character type

• Press [DISP.] button

• Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

■To continue entering characters

• Use to select [ ] and press [MENU/SET]

• Move the zoom lever toward T side

• Rotate the control dial clockwise.

■To edit text

Use to select [ ] [ ] and press [MENU/SET]. Then, move the cursor

to the text to edit

• You can also use the zoom lever or control dial to reposition the cursor.

Use to select [Delete] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the correct text, and press [MENU/SET]

3When you are finished entering text, use to select

[Set] and press [MENU/SET]

●A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters when setting names in

[Face Recog.]).

●A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] (maximum of

6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).

53 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings

(Intelligent Auto Mode)

Recording mode:

This mode is recommended for those who want to point and shoot as the camera

optimizes settings to match the subject and recording environment.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

• The camera will switch to either the most recently used

of Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent

Auto Mode.

2Point the camera at the subject

• When the camera identifies the optimal scene, the

icon for each scene turns blue for 2 seconds and then

changes to the normal red indication.

(Automatic Scene Detection)

60p

■Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode

Select the [ ] or [ ] tab on the menu screen, press to

select [ ] or [ ], and press [MENU/SET].

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording

mode icon in recording screen.

60p

[ ] allows you to adjust some settings such as the brightness and color tone while

also using [ ] for other settings so that you can record pictures more suited to your

preferences.

(○: Available, –: Not available)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode

Setting the color tone ○–

Setting the brightness

(exposure) ○–

Defocus control

function ○–

Menus that can be set Many Few

54 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition

[AF Mode] is automatically set to [ ]. If you touch the subject, the camera switches to

[ ] and the AF tracking function starts operating. (→94)

You can also switch to [ ] by pressing [MENU/SET], going to the [Rec] menu, then

going to the [AF Mode] menu and selecting [ ] (tracking). Align the AF tracking area with

the subject and press the shutter button halfway to operate the AF tracking function.

• When [Face Recog.] (→180) is set to [ON] and if the camera recognizes a face similar

to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the [ ], [ ], and

[ ] icons.

Flash

When is pressed and [ ] (auto) selected, the camera will automatically be set to [ ],

[ ] (Auto/Red-Eye Reduction), [ ], or [ ], depending on the type of subject and

brightness.

●When [ ] or [ ] is displayed, the [Red-Eye Removal] function is activated to automatically

detect red-eye and correct the picture data.

●When [ ] or [ ] is selected, the shutter speed is reduced.

Automatic Scene Detection

When taking pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro]

[i-Night Portrait]*1[i-Night Scenery] [i-Handheld Night Shot]*2

[i-Food] [i-Baby]*3[i-Sunset]

When scene does not correspond to any of the above

When recording motion pictures

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Low Light] [i-Macro]

When scene does not correspond to any of the above

*1 Displayed only when using flash.

*2 When [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON]. (→55)

*3 When children (that are registered in the camera with Face Recognition) under 3 years old are

recognized.

55 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

• When the camera identifies [ ] as the optimal scene and if the camera determines

that jitter is reduced by the use of a tripod or by other means, a shutter speed that

is slower than usual is selected. After pressing the shutter button, do not move the

camera while recording.

• When recording 4K photos or when recording using [Post Focus], Scene Detection

works the same way as when recording motion pictures.

●Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be determined for the same

subject.

About Backlight Compensation

Backlight compensation is automatically activated in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto

Mode. Backlight is a condition where a light shines from behind a subject. When there is a backlight,

the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically attempt to correct it by increasing the

brightness of the picture.

Taking pictures using a handheld camera

([iHandheld Night Shot])

Recording mode:

If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld, [iHandheld

Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less noise without using a tripod

by combining a burst of pictures.

→ [Rec] → [iHandheld Night Shot]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When recording using [Bracket]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

56 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Combining pictures into a single still picture with rich

gradation ([iHDR])

Recording mode:

When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,

[iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing exposures and combines them to

create a single still picture rich in gradation.

[iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the screen.

→ [Rec] → [iHDR]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you can record another picture.

●In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was moving.

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When recording using the flash

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When recording using [Bracket]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

Setting coloring

Recording mode:

1Press to display the setting screen

2Rotate the control dial to adjust color

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

• The color setting will return to the default level (center point)

when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched to another

Recording mode.

• With touch screen operations (→57)

57 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures with automatic settings (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Setting brightness (exposure)/blurriness of the background

(Defocus control function)

Recording mode:

1Press to display the setting screen

• The brightness (exposure) operation screen is displayed. Press [Fn1] to switch defocus control

operation to operation finish.

2Rotate the control dial to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

When setting the brightness (exposure)

• Press to set the exposure bracket. (→134)

OFF

When setting the background defocusing

• Pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button will cancel the setting.

• Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ]. The position of the AF area can

be set by touching the screen. (Its size cannot be changed)

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.64.0

■With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Coloring

[ ]: Degree of defocusing

[ ]: Brightness (exposure)

Drag the slide bar or exposure meter to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

58 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

Recording mode:

If you rotate the monitor, Self Shot Mode is activated. You can easily take pictures of

yourself while looking at the screen.

In Self Shot Mode...

●Deciding on a composition is easier because recording is performed

while looking at the screen.

●Pictures with different poses and facial expressions can be taken at

once by increasing the number of pictures to be recorded.

●Automatically enables the touch operation.

●Settings for the respective Recording Modes are maintained, except

for the recording settings for Self Shot Mode.

1Rotate the monitor as shown in the figure

• When you rotate the monitor, a mirror image will be

displayed on the monitor.

59 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

2Touch the item

([Soft Skin]) Makes people’s faces look brighter and their skin tones look

softer.

([Filter Select]) Add a picture effect (filter) appropriate to [Self Shot].

([Background

Control])

Changes the degree of defocusing for the background of detected

faces.

[ ] (Defocus): Defocuses the background of detected faces.

(Faces further from the camera, however, will be

defocused in the background.)

[ ] (Clear): Records faces and the background with clarity.

([Slimming Mode]) Makes people look slimmer.

([Shutter]) Sets the way the shutter is released.

([Countdown])/

([Shots])

Set the number of seconds before recording ([Countdown]) and

the number of consecutive shots ([Shots]).

3Touch the slide bar

• You can set it to “Off” or a value in the range [1] to

[10]. If you select the left edge of the slide bar ( ), it

will be set to “Off”.

• In the case of [Filter Select], [Background Control],

[Shutter], or [Shots], select from the icons.

ExitExit

[Filter Select] [ ] (No effect), [ ] (Expressive), [ ] (Retro), [ ] (High key),

[ ] (Monochrome), [ ] (Toy effect)

[Background Control] [ ] (Off), [ ] (Defocus), [ ] (Clear)

[Shutter] [ ] (Shutter button only), [ ] (Touch), [ ] (Buddy), [ ] (Face)

[Shots] [ ] (1 pic.), [ ] (2 pic.), [ ] (3 pic.), [ ] (4 pic.)

60 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

4Touch [Exit]

5Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor

• The AF area is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face/Eye Detection

function. (If [ ] in AF Mode is not available with the current Recording Mode, an

available focus setting for each Recording Mode will be used.)

6Press the shutter button halfway to focus

and then press it fully to take the picture

•Look at the lens when recording.

• Countdown starts, and recording takes place when it

ends. If multiple pictures are set to be recorded, the

recording continues until the set number is reached.

• For information on how to start taking a picture using

[Shutter], refer to (→61).

61 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

■Changing the way the shutter is released

In [Shutter], you can select the way you start recording without pressing the shutter

button.

We recommend that you avoid using the shutter button when, for example, jitter occurs

during shutter operation.

• For information on [ ] (Touch), refer to (→43).

• [ ] (Buddy)

The shutter is released when two faces detected by the Face/Eye Detection function

move closer to each other.

Display two Face/Eye Detection frames

• When [ ] (Buddy) is selected, even if several subjects are present, Face/Eye Detection

detects only a maximum of two faces.

The shutter is released when the two frames come within a certain distance of each

other

• [ ] (Face)

The shutter is released when a face detected by the Face/Eye Detection function is

covered with a hand or other object and then detected again.

Display the yellow frame of Face/Eye Detection

Cover your face with your hand or other object so that the yellow frame disappears

for a moment

When you move your hand away and the yellow frame appears, the shutter is

released

●You can start recording with the shutter button regardless of the [Shutter] setting.

62 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

Taking pictures of yourself in Panorama Shot Mode

By recording with Panorama Shot Mode, you can enjoy a variety of self-portraits, such as

those with your friends or those incorporating a wide background.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the monitor to enable Self Shot Mode

• Instructions explaining how to take a picture will be displayed.

3Read the recording instructions, and touch [Next] or [Start]

• The instructions continue to the next page. Follow the steps until the recording screen is

displayed.

4Point the camera at the front, and strike a pose while look at the monitor

• The AF area is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face Detection function.

5Press the shutter button halfway (or fully) to lock the focus and exposure

• After pressing the shutter button halfway (or fully), release your finger from it completely.

• Touch [ ] to retry.

6Point the camera to the position where you start recording, press the shutter

button fully, and pan the camera in the direction indicated on the screen in

step 3 to take the picture

7Press the shutter button fully again to end recording

• You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures.

• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.

63 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

■Changing the recording direction of panorama pictures

→ [Rec] → [Panorama Settings] → [Direction]

• The [Picture Size] cannot be set in Self Shot Mode.

• The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama

picture varies depending on the recording direction and number of stitched pictures.

The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows:

Recording direction Horizontal Resolution Vertical Resolution

Horizontal 4080 pixels 1920 pixels

Vertical 2560 pixels 3840 pixels

Tips

Swivel the camera around its center when moving it in the

recording direction. Hold the camera with both hands, taking care

not to shake it.

• If the camera shakes too much, it may not be able to take

pictures or may end up creating a narrow (small) panorama

picture.

• Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the point that you

want to take. (However, the last frame is not recorded to the

end.)

• If you change the facial expression or blink, the recorded

picture may look unnatural. Try to stay still.

Example:

●We recommend setting the zoom position to Wide when using Self Shot Mode.

●Since the distance between the camera and subject is close when you take panorama pictures in

Self Shot Mode, the edges of the pictures may appear significantly distorted.

64 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

Taking pictures of yourself in 4K Photo Mode (4K Selfie)

When you take pictures of yourself in 4K Photo Mode, you can easily select your favorites

from among self-portraits taken with high-speed burst recording.

1Touch [ ]

• For details on how to record, refer to steps 2 - 3 of “Recording

with the 4K Photo function”. (→114)

●When recording 4K photos, the angle of view becomes narrower.

●For 4K photo recording, only [Filter Select] can be set.

65 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures of Yourself [Self Shot]

●If you set [Self Shot] to [OFF], the mode will not switch to Self Shot Mode even if you rotate the

monitor.

●Be careful not to look at the light from the flash and the AF Assist Lamp directly.

●When the [Soft Skin] is set

• If you set the strength of the effect to [2] or greater, the recording screen display will be more

delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also, when you record, it will require some time to

process the image before the next shot.

• The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar tone to the complexion of a subject,

as well.

• This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting.

●When [Background Control] is set to [ ] (Defocus), the recording screen display will be more

delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also, when you record, it will require some time to

process the image before the next shot.

●If the lighting is insufficient when [Background Control] is set to [ ] (Clear), you may not be able

to take pictures as desired.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

●You cannot use [Soft Skin] and a [Background Control] setting of [ ] (Defocus) when using one

of the following settings:

• [Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape],

[Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower],

[Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)

• Creative Control Mode

• Panorama Shot Mode

• In Manual Focus

●You cannot use a [Background Control] setting of [ ] (Clear) when using one of the following

settings:

• Any mode for Scene Guide Mode other than [Silky Skin]/[Monochrome]

• Aperture-Priority AE Mode

• Shutter-Priority AE Mode

• Manual Exposure Mode

• Creative Control Mode

●[Countdown] and [Shots] are not available in the following case:

• Panorama Shot Mode

●[ ] (Buddy) and [ ] (Face) are not available in the following cases:

• Recording Modes which do not allow setting to [ ] of AF Mode (→93)

• Panorama Shot Mode

• In Manual Focus

66 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures after automatically setting the

aperture value and shutter speed (Program AE Mode)

Recording mode:

Take pictures using automatic aperture values and shutter speed settings in accordance

with the brightness of a subject.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press the shutter button halfway

• If the aperture value and shutter speed flash red, you do not have the correct

exposure.

3While the numeric values are displayed

(approximately 10 seconds), rotate the

control dial to change the values using

Program Shift

Program Shift indication

Aperture value

Shutter speed

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.64.0

60p

• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring. (→38)

• To cancel Program Shift, either turn off the camera or rotate the control dial until

the Program Shift indication turns off.

• Program Shift can easily be canceled by setting a function button to [One Push

AE]. (→71)

About Program Shift

The function for maintaining the same exposure (brightness) while changing the aperture

value and shutter speed combination is called “Program Shift”. You can use “Program

Shift” to take pictures by adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed even in Program

AE Mode.

●Program Shift cannot be used in the following cases:

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]

67 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording mode:

• The effect of the aperture value and shutter speed you have set is not applied to the

recording screen. To check the effect on the recording screen, use Preview Mode.

(→70)

• The brightness of the screen may vary from the actual pictures recorded. Check the

brightness of pictures using the playback screen.

• When you adjust the aperture value and shutter speed, an exposure meter is displayed.

If aperture and shutter speed are shown in red, you do not have appropriate exposure.

• If the correct exposure is not achieved when you press the shutter button halfway, the

numeric values of the aperture and shutter speed are displayed in flashing red.

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value

(Aperture-Priority AE Mode)

When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimizes the shutter speed

for the brightness of the subject.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the control dial to set the aperture value

• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.

(→38)

Aperture value

Exposure meter

Aperture values

that can be set*1Shutter speed set (seconds)

F3.3 - F8.0

4*2 - 1/2000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1*2 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

*1 You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom

position.

*2 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→108)

250 125 60 30 15

8.05.64.0

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and

shutter speed

68 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Taking pictures by setting the shutter speed

(Shutter-Priority AE Mode)

When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimizes the aperture value

for the brightness of the subject.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Rotate the control dial to set the shutter speed

• The operation can also be performed by rotating the control ring.

(→38)

Shutter speed

Exposure meter

Shutter speeds that can be set (seconds) Aperture value

set

4* - 1/2000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1* - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

F3.3 - F8.0

* Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→108)

15 30 60 125 250

4.0.0 5.6

69 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

(Manual Exposure Mode)

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Turn the control ring to set the aperture value, and turn

the control dial to set the shutter speed

• You can switch the setting operation of control ring and control

dial by pressing .

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Manual Exposure Assist

Exposure meter

Aperture values that

can be set*1

Shutter speeds that can be set

(seconds)

F3.3 - F8.0

4*2 - 1/2000

(When the mechanical shutter is used)

1*2 - 1/16000

(When the electronic shutter is used)

*1 You may not be able to select some values depending on zoom

position.

*2 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→108)

8 15 30 60 125

8.04.0 5.6

Optimizing the ISO sensitivity for the aperture value and shutter speed

When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity automatically so that the

exposure will be appropriate for the aperture value and shutter speed.

• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO sensitivity

may become higher.

Manual exposure assist (estimate)

Shows pictures with standard brightness (appropriate exposure).

Shows brighter pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a faster shutter

speed or increase aperture value.

Shows darker pictures. For the appropriate exposure, either use a slower shutter

speed or reduce aperture value.

70 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

Checking the effects of the aperture value and shutter speed

(Preview Mode)

Recording mode:

You can use Preview Mode to check the effects of the selected aperture value and shutter

speed.

• Checking the effect of the selected aperture value: This enables you to check the

depth of field (focus range) by physically narrowing the lens aperture blades to the

aperture value used for the actual recording.

• Checking the effect of the selected shutter speed: This allows you to check motion

in a scene by displaying the screen at the shutter speed used for the actual recording.

Preparations

• Assign [Preview] to the function button (→48)

The following step is an example of assigning [Preview] to the [Fn3] button.

1Press the [Fn3] button to switch the confirmation screen

• Every time you press the [Fn3] button, the screen switches.

Normal recording screen

Aperture effect preview

screen

Aperture effect: ○

Shutter speed effect: –

Shutter speed effect

preview screen

Aperture effect: ○

Shutter speed effect: ○

Fn3

Shtr Speed Effect added.

Fn3

Preview completed.

Depth of field characteristic

Recording

conditions

Aperture value Small Large

Focal length Telephoto Wide-angle

Distance to a subject Close Far

Depth of field

(Focus range)

Shallow (narrow)

Example:

To take a picture by

deliberately blurring the

background

Deep (wide)

Example:

To take a picture by adjusting

the focus while including the

background

71 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures by setting the aperture value and shutter speed

●You can take a picture even when Preview Mode is activated.

●The range in which you can check the effect of a selected shutter speed is between 8 seconds

and 1/16000 seconds.

●This mode cannot be used with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of 4K Photo.

Easily set aperture value / shutter speed for suitable exposure

(One Push AE)

Recording mode:

When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve

a suitable exposure setting.

How to tell if the exposure is not adequate

Blinks red

• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

• If the Manual Exposure Assistance (→69) is anything other than

[ ] when in Manual Exposure Mode.

Preparations

• Assign [One Push AE] to the function button (→48)

1(When exposure is not adequate) Press the function button

Change to appropriate exposure

4.0 5.6

15 30 125 250

8.0

●In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.

• When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure by

changing the aperture value or shutter speed

• When recording using the flash

• Preview Mode (→70)

72 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording mode:

Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press the shutter button halfway to focus

3Press the shutter button fully and pan the camera in a small

circular motion to the recording direction to start recording

Horizontal/vertical guide line

Recording direction and progress status (approximate)

Taking pictures from left to right

Image size: [STANDARD] Image size: [WIDE]

• Pan the camera at a constant speed.

• You may not be able to take pictures successfully if you move the camera too quickly or too

slowly.

4Press the shutter button fully again to end recording

• You can also end recording if you stop panning the camera while taking pictures.

• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

73 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

■Changing the recording direction and angle of view (image size) of panorama

pictures

→ [Rec] → [Panorama Settings]

[Direction] Sets the recording direction.

[Picture Size] Sets the angle of view (image size).

[STANDARD] / [WIDE]

• The number of recording pixels per horizontal line and vertical line of a panorama

picture varies depending on the picture size, recording direction and number of stitched

pictures. The maximum number of recording pixels is as follows:

Image size Recording direction Horizontal Resolution Vertical Resolution

[STANDARD] Horizontal 8176 pixels 1920 pixels

Vertical 2560 pixels 7680 pixels

[WIDE] Horizontal 8176 pixels 960 pixels

Vertical 1280 pixels 7680 pixels

Tips

Pan the camera in the recording direction as steadily as possible.

(If the camera shakes too much, it may not be able to take pictures or may end up creating a narrow

(small) panorama picture.)

Pan the camera to a point slightly ahead of the

point that you want to take.

(However, the last frame is not recorded to the

end.)

74 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

■About panorama picture playback

Pressing will start scrolling playback automatically in the

same direction as the recording.

• The following operations can be performed during scrolling

playback.

Start panorama playback / Pause*

Stop

* When the playback is paused, you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the screen. When

the scroll bar is touched, the playback position jumps to the touched position.

●The zoom position is fixed to the W end.

●The focus, exposure and White Balance are all fixed to optimal values for the first picture.

If the focusing or brightness of pictures recorded as part of a panorama picture after the first

picture are significantly different from those of the first picture, the panorama picture as a whole

(when all pictures are stitched together) may not have consistent focus and brightness.

●Since several pictures are stitched together to create a panorama picture, some subjects may be

distorted or the joining portions of successively taken pictures that are stitched may be noticeable.

●Panorama pictures may not be created or pictures may not be recorded properly when taking

pictures of the following subjects or when taking pictures in the following recording conditions:

• Subjects that have a continuous monotone or pattern (sky, beach, etc.)

• Moving subjects (person, pet, vehicle, waves, or flowers swaying in the wind, etc.)

• Subjects whose colors or patterns change quickly (such as an image appearing on a display)

• Dark locations

• Locations with a flickering light source (fluorescent lamp, candle light, etc.)

75 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording mode:

If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the

example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, color, and focus, allowing you to

record in a manner appropriate to the scene.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press to select the scene

• The scene can also be selected by dragging an

example image or the slide bar.

3Press [MENU/SET]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording

mode icon in recording screen.

60p

●Depending on the scene, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.

●To change the Scene Guide Mode, select the [ ] tab on the menu screen, select [Scene

Switch], and then press [MENU/SET]. You can return to step 2.

●The following items cannot be set in Scene Guide Mode because the camera automatically

adjusts them to the optimal setting.

– Items other than the picture quality adjustment in [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Sensitivity],

[Metering Mode] and [HDR]

●Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scenes, you can fine tune the White

Balance or use White Balance bracketing by pressing [MENU/SET], going to the [Rec] menu, and

selecting [White Balance]. (→112, 113)

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

76 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

Types of Scene Guide Mode

Displaying the description of each scene and recording tips

Press [DISP.] button while the scene selection screen is displayed

• When it is set to the guide display, detailed explanations and tips for each scene are displayed.

Normal display Guide display List display

1: [Clear Portrait]

2: [Silky Skin]

●If a part of the background etc. is a color close to skin color, this part is also smoothed.

●This mode may not be effective when there is insufficient brightness.

3: [Backlit Softness]

4: [Clear in Backlight]

5: [Relaxing Tone]

6: [Sweet Child’s Face]

●When you touch the face, a still picture is recorded with the focus and exposure set for the touched

location.

7: [Distinct Scenery]

77 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

8: [Bright Blue Sky]

9: [Romantic Sunset Glow]

10: [Vivid Sunset Glow]

11: [Glistening Water]

●Star filter used in this mode may cause glistening effects on the objects other than water surface.

12: [Clear Nightscape]

13: [Cool Night Sky]

14: [Warm Glowing Nightscape]

15: [Artistic Nightscape]

16: [Glittering Illuminations]

17: [Handheld Night Shot]

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●The angle of view becomes narrow slightly.

18: [Clear Night Portrait]

●Tripod, self-timer recommended.

●When [Clear Night Portrait] is selected, keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the

picture.

19: [Soft Image of a Flower]

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.

78 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking pictures according to the scene (Scene Guide Mode)

20: [Appetizing Food]

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.

21: [Cute Dessert]

●For close-up recording, we recommend that you avoid using the flash.

22: [Freeze Animal Motion]

●Default [AF Assist Lamp] setting is [OFF].

23: [Clear Sports Shot]

24: [Monochrome]

79 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects

(Creative Control Mode)

Recording mode:

This mode records with additional picture effects. You can set the effects to be applied to

a picture by selecting a sample picture and checking them simultaneously on the screen.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Press to select the picture effect

(filters)

Preview display

• You can also select the picture effects (filters) by

touching the example images.

3Press [MENU/SET]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording

mode icon in recording screen.

60p

●Depending on the picture effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.

●[White Balance] will be fixed to [AWB] and ISO sensitivity to [AUTO].

●The following menu items can be set in the [ ] menu.

– [Filter Effect]: Allows you to set the picture effect (filter).

– [Simultaneous record w/o filter]: Allows you to set the camera to take a

picture with and without an picture effect simultaneously. (→172)

80 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Types of picture effects

Displaying the description of each picture effect (Filter)

Press [DISP.] button while the picture effect selection screen is displayed

• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.

Normal display Guide display List display

■Setting the type of defocus ([Miniature Effect])

After touching [ ], touch [ ]

Press or to move the focusing area (frame)

• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the screen on

the recording screen.

• Touching [ ] allows you to set the recording orientation (defocus

orientation).

Rotate the control dial to select the size of the focusing area

(frame)

• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom in,

and pinch (pinch in) your 2 fingers to zoom out. (→42)

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

Press [MENU/SET]

●No audio is recorded for motion pictures.

●When a motion picture is recorded, the finished recording will be approximately 1/10th of the

actual recorded time period. (If you record a motion picture for 10 minutes, the resulting motion

picture recording time will be approximately 1 minute.) The recordable time displayed on the

camera is approx. 10 times of the actual recording time.

●If you stop recording motion pictures too soon, the camera may continue recording until a certain

time.

81 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

■Selecting the color to be retained ([One Point Color])

After touching [ ], touch [ ]

Select the color to be retained with and press

[MENU/SET]

• You can also select it by touch operations.

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is

restored.

●The selected color may not be retained for some subjects.

■Setting the position and size of the light source ([Sunshine])

After touching [ ], touch [ ]

Press to move the center of the light source to a different position

• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.

Rotate the control dial to adjust the size of the light source

• On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) your 2 fingers to zoom in, and pinch (pinch in) your

2 fingers to zoom out.

• When you press [DISP.] button, the initial setting condition is restored.

Press [MENU/SET]

Tips on positioning the center of the light source

You can move the center of the light source to a point outside the image to obtain a more natural

finish.

82 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Adjusting the picture effects according to your preferences

You can easily adjust the setting conditions (such as degree and coloring of an effect) of

the picture effects according to your preferences.

1Press to display the setting screen

2Rotate the control dial to adjust the setting conditions

of the picture effects

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

Picture effect Items that can be set

[Expressive] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

[Retro] Coloring

Yellowish coloring Reddish coloring

[Old Days] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[High Key] Coloring

Pinkish coloring Light-bluish coloring

[Low Key] Coloring

Reddish coloring Bluish coloring

[Sepia] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Monochrome] Coloring

Yellowish coloring Bluish coloring

[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Rough Monochrome] Grainy picture effect

Weak grainy picture effect Strong grainy picture effect

[Silky Monochrome] Degree of defocusing

Slight defocusing Strong defocusing

[Impressive Art]Vividness

Black & white Gaudy coloring

[High Dynamic] Vividness

Black & white Gaudy coloring

83 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Picture effect Items that can be set

[Cross Process] Coloring

Greenish coloring / Bluish coloring /

Yellowish coloring / Reddish coloring

• Select the desired color tone by rotating

the control dial, and press [MENU/SET].

[Toy Effect] Coloring

Orangish coloring Bluish coloring

[Toy Pop] Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced

Small Large

[Bleach Bypass] Contrast

Low contrast High contrast

[Miniature Effect] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

• For details about [Miniature Effect] (→80)

[Soft Focus] Degree of defocusing

Slight defocusing Strong defocusing

[Fantasy] Vividness

Subdued coloring Gaudy coloring

[Star Filter] Length of the rays of light

Rays of light is short Rays of light is long

Number of the rays of light

Smaller Larger

Angle of the rays of light

Rotate to the left Rotate to the right

[One Point Color] Amount of color retained

Leaves a small amount of

color

Leaves a large amount of

color

• For details about [One Point Color] (→81)

[Sunshine] Coloring

Yellowish coloring / Reddish coloring /

Bluish coloring / Whitish coloring

• Rotate the control dial to select coloring,

and press [MENU/SET].

• For details about [Sunshine] (→81)

84 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Taking Pictures with different picture effects (Creative Control Mode)

Setting brightness (exposure)/blurriness of the background (Defocus

control function)

1Press to display the setting screen

• The brightness (exposure) operation screen is displayed. Press [Fn1] to switch defocus control

operation to operation finish.

2Rotate the control dial to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

When setting the brightness (exposure)

• Press to set the exposure bracket. (→134)

OFF

When setting the background defocusing

• Pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button will cancel the setting.

250 125 60 30 15

5.64.0

8.0

■With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect

[ ]: Degree of defocusing

[ ]: Brightness (exposure)

Drag the slide bar or exposure meter to set

• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

●Defocus control operation is not available in [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode).

85 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture/

shutter speed/ISO sensitivity (Creative Video Mode)

Recording mode:

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Set the menu (→45)

→ [Motion Picture] → [Exposure Mode]

Settings: [P] / [A] / [S] / [M]

• The operation for changing the aperture value, shutter speed or ISO sensitivity is

the same as the operation for setting the mode dial to [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording mode

icon in recording screen.

60p

3Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start

recording

4Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop

recording

●When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M], [AUTO] of the ISO sensitivity will switch to [80].

86 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity (Creative Video Mode)

Recording Slow Motion Pictures ([High Speed Video])

Slow motion pictures can be recorded by performing recording at a super high speed.

When these recordings are played back, the motion is displayed slowly.

• To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→27)

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Set the menu (→45)

→ [Motion Picture] → [High Speed Video]

[240fps/VGA] Recording is done at 240 frames/second with [VGA] in [MP4].

[120fps/HD] Recording is done at 120 frames/second with [HD] in [MP4].

3Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording

4Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to stop recording

●When recording, the angle of view becomes narrower.

●No sound is recorded.

●Files are split into smaller motion picture files for recording and playback when the file size

exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue to record motion pictures without interruption.)

Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

(In terms of playback time, you can record up to approximately 120 minutes.)

●The settings for the focus, zoom, exposure and White Balance are fixed to the settings specified

when recording was started.

●Flickering or horizontal stripes may appear while recording under fluorescent lighting.

87 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Recording motion pictures by setting the aperture/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity (Creative Video Mode)

Minimizing operational sounds during motion picture

recording ([Silent Operation])

The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is

operated during the recording of a motion picture. Using touch icons allows silent

operation while recording motion pictures.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Silent Operation] → [ON]

1Start recording

2Touch [ ]

3Touch icon

Zoom

Aperture value

Shutter speed

Exposure Compensation

ISO sensitivity

4Drag the slide bar to set

• The speed of the operation varies depending on the position

you touch.

[ ] / [ ] Changes the setting slowly

[ ] / [ ] Changes the setting quickly

5Stop recording

●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.

88 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Registering your own settings and recording

(Custom Mode)

Recording mode:

Registering your own settings ([Cust.Set Mem.])

Up to 3 sets of current camera settings can be registered using [Cust.Set Mem.].

([ ], [ ], [ ])

• Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.

Preparations

• Set in advance the recording mode and menu settings so that the camera can be in the state with

the settings to be saved.

→ [Custom] → [Cust.Set Mem.]

→ Custom set where you want to register settings

●The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.

[Rec] menu [Setup] menu

• Data registered with [Face Recog.]

• The [Profile Setup] setting

• All menus

[Custom] menu [Playback] menu

• [Touch Scroll]

• [Menu Guide]

• [Rotate Disp.]

• [Picture Sort]

89 DVQP1285

Recording mode

Registering your own settings and recording (Custom Mode)

Recording using registered custom set

1Set mode dial to [ ]

• The custom set you used last time will be called up.

■To change a custom set

Set mode dial to [ ]

Press [MENU/SET] to bring up the menu

Press to select the custom set you want to use, and press [MENU/SET]

• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the

custom set. 60p

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the Recording mode

icon in recording screen.

60p

■Changing the registered content

Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily when the mode dial has been set to

[ ], the currently registered settings will remain unchanged. To change the currently

registered settings, overwrite the registered data using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Custom]

menu.

90 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Recording mode:

By setting a focusing action when the shutter button is pressed halfway or an Auto

Focus Mode according to the subject and recording conditions, you can let the camera

automatically adjust the focus for various scenes.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select [AF] and press [MENU/SET]

• Set the focusing action when the shutter button is pressed halfway (→91)

• Switch the Auto Focus mode (→92)

3Press the shutter button halfway

Focus display

( When focus is aligned: illuminated

When focus is not aligned: flashing)

AF area

(When focus is aligned: green)

• Two “beep” sounds are heard and Auto Focus is activated.

Four “beep” sounds when focus is not aligned.

• When you take a picture in a dark location, [ ] is displayed for the focus display

and it may take longer to adjust focus than usual.

Subjects/environments which may make focusing difficult:

• Fast-moving or extremely bright objects, or objects with no color contrast.

• Taking pictures through glass or near objects emitting light.

• In the dark, or with significant jitter.

• When too close to object or when taking pictures of both distant and close objects together in

the same picture.

91 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Set the focusing operation to be performed when the shutter

button is pressed halfway (AFS, AFF, AFC)

Recording mode:

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AFS/AFF/AFC]

Settings

The movement of the

subject and the scene

(recommended)

Description

[AFS]

Subject is still

(Scenery, anniversary

photograph, etc.)

“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. Focus

is set automatically when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

Focus will be fixed while it is pressed halfway.

[AFF]

Movement cannot be

predicted (Children,

pets, etc.)

“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”. In this

mode, focusing is performed automatically when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the focus is corrected to match the movement

automatically.

[AFC] Subject is moving

(Sport, trains, etc.)

“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. In

this mode, while the shutter button is pressed halfway,

focusing is constantly performed to match the movement

of the subject. When the subject is moving, the focusing is

performed by predicting the subject position at the time of

recording. (Movement prediction)

When recording using [AFF], [AFC]

●Focusing may take time if the zoom is suddenly changed from max. Wide to max. Tele, or if you

suddenly move closer to a subject from a greater distance.

●Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

●While the shutter button pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

●[AFF] or [AFC] operates as [AFS] in the following case:

• Creative Video Mode

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) of the 4K Photo function.

• When the lighting is low

●It is fixed to [AFS] when Panorama Shot Mode is set.

●[AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. Continuous AF works during recording.

●This setting cannot be used when recording using [Post Focus].

92 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Switching [AF Mode]

Recording mode:

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be

selected.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AF Mode]

Settings: [ ] (Face/Eye Detection) / [ ] (Tracking) / [ ] (49-area-focusing) /

[ ] etc. (Custom Multi) / [ ] (1-area-focusing) / [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing)

(→93 - 97)

●In Intelligent Auto Mode and Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, [ ] or [ ] can be set.

●The [AF Mode] is fixed to [ ] in the following case:

• In Self Shot Mode (If [ ] is not available with the current recording mode, an available focus

setting for each recording mode will be used.)

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

●Auto Focus is fixed to [ ] in the following cases:

• When using the Digital Zoom

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

●[AF Mode] cannot be set in the following cases:

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

93 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Taking front-on pictures of people (Face/Eye Detection)

The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts

the focus on the eye that is closer to the camera and the exposure using the face (when

[Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi Metering)).

• The camera can detect up to 15 faces. The camera can detect only the eye of face to

be focused on.

When the camera recognized a face, the AF area and eye

used for focusing are displayed.

Eye used for focusing

Yellow: When the shutter button is pressed halfway and the

subject is focused, the frame turns green.

White: Displayed when more than one face is detected.

Other faces that are the same distance away as faces

within the yellow AF area are also focused.

■Changing the eye to be in focus

Touch the eye to be used for focusing

If you touch a location outside the yellow frame, the AF area setting

screen will be displayed. (→98)

• If you touch [ ] or press [MENU/SET], the eye focus setting will be

canceled.

●Cannot set to [ ] (Face/Eye Detection) in the following cases:

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide

Mode)

●The eye to be in focus cannot be changed when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

●If conditions prevent the face from being recognized, such as when the movement of the subject is

too rapid, the AF Mode setting switches to [ ] (49-area-focusing).

94 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Automatically locking the focus on a moving subject (tracking)

With cursor button operations

Align the AF Tracking area with the subject and press the

shutter button halfway

AF Tracking area

When the subject is recognized, the AF tracking area turns green.

When you release the shutter button, the AF tracking area turns yellow

and the subject is automatically kept in focus.

• To release AF Tracking → Press [MENU/SET].

• Focus range: same as macro recording [ ] (→103)

With touch screen operations

Touch the subject

Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.

The AF Tracking area turns yellow while the subject is locked.

• To release AF Tracking → Touch [ ].

●If AF Lock fails, a red frame flashes for a while and then turns off.

●When you set [Metering Mode] to [ ] (Multi Metering), the camera adjusts the exposure using a

locked subject. (→174)

●Under certain recording conditions, such as when the subject is small or dark, AF Tracking may

not operate correctly. When AF Tracking does not work, focus will be on [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●This function is not available in the following case:

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

●In the following cases, [ ] performs the operation of [ ] (1-area-focusing).

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower], [Monochrome]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome],

[Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Monochrome] ([Photo Style])

95 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Subject not centered in picture (49-area-focusing)

Focuses on the subject in the wide range area (up to 49-area-

focusing) on the recording screen.

Setting the shape of an AF area , etc. (Custom Multi)

You can set the preferred shape of an AF area by selecting 49 points in the AF area,

based on the subject.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AF Mode]

1Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press

Current AF area shape

2Use to select the setting item

([Horizontal

Pattern])

Horizontal line shape

Ideal shape for panning,

etc.

([Vertical

Pattern])

Vertical line shape

Ideal shape for recording

structures, etc.

([Central

Pattern])

Shape distributed over

the center

Ideal shape for focusing

around the center.

/ /

(Custom) You can set a custom registration shape.

3Press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

96 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

4Select the AF area

Selected AF area

When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

Operation Touch

operation Description

Touch Moves position

Pinch out /

Pinch in Changes the size (3 stages)

[DISP.] [Reset] Restores to the initial

settings

When selecting [ ] / [ ] / [ ]

With cursor button operations

Use to select AF area and press [MENU/SET] to set

(repeat)

• If you press [MENU/SET] again, the setting will be canceled.

• To cancel all the settings, press the [DISP.] button.

With touch screen operations

Touch the parts you want to set as AF areas

• If you touch one of the selected AF areas, the selection of the

area will be canceled.

5Press [Fn2] button

■Registering the set AF area in [ ], [ ] and [ ] (Custom)

Press on the screen of step 2

Use to select the registration target icon and press [MENU/SET]

●The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ] or [ ] will be restored to the default settings when the

camera is turned off.

97 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Determined position for focus (1-area-focusing) /

(Pinpoint-focusing)

(1-area-focusing)

Focuses on AF area in center of picture. (Recommended when focus is difficult to align)

When the subject is not in the center of the composition in [ ], you can bring the subject

into the AF area, fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button halfway, move the

camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed halfway, and then take the

picture. (Only when [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS].)

(Pinpoint-focusing)

Enables more precise focusing on a smaller point than [ ] (1-area-focusing). When you

press the shutter button halfway, an enlarged display of the focus position appears.

●If [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) is selected while recording motion pictures or 4K photos, the setting is

changed to [ ] (1-area-focusing).

●Cannot set to [ ] (Pinpoint-focusing) in the following case:

• When [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC]

98 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Changing the position and size of the AF area

Recording mode:

When [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the

position and size of the AF area.

• Perform these operations with the touch shutter function released.

• You can also display the AF area setting screen by touching the recording screen.

(When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu has been set to [AF].)

●When you set [Metering Mode] (→174) to [ ] (spot-focusing), the metering target will move

along with the AF area.

●The position and size of the AF area cannot be changed in the Digital Zoom range.

■When selecting [ ] / [ ]

You can change the position and size of the AF area.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AF Mode]

Select [ ] or [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

To change the AF area

Operation Touch operation Description

Touch To move the position of the AF area.

—Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.

[DISP.] [Reset]

Resets the AF area back to the center.

• If you press the button again, the frame size will be

reset to the initial setting.

Press [MENU/SET]

• AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed in the touched position, when the [ ] is

selected. Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.

99 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

■When selecting [ ]

You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The AF area, which is

configured with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of 9 points each (6 points or 4

points for the groups located at the edges of the screen).

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AF Mode]

Select [ ] and press

• The AF area setting screen appears.

Examples of group

Press to select an AF area group

Press [MENU/SET]

• Only the [+] indications (center points of the selected group) remain on the

screen.

• Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is

touched.

100 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

■When selecting [ ]

You can enlarge the screen to perform more precise settings of the focus position.

• You cannot set the focus position at the edges of the screen.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [AF Mode]

Select [ ] and press

Use to set the focus position and press

[MENU/SET]

• The enlarged assist screen will appear for setting the focus

position.

Move [+] to the focus position

Operation Touch operation Description

Touch Moves [+].

— Pinch in / Pinch out Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.

—

Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full

screen)

[DISP.] [Reset] Resets [+] back to the center.

• The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 6 times. The

image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 10 times.

• On the assist screen, it is also possible to record a picture by touching [ ].

Press [MENU/SET]

101 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Setting the AF area position with the touch pad

Recording mode:

You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by

touching the monitor.

→ [Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch Pad AF]

[EXACT] Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by

touching a desired position on the touch

pad.

[OFFSET] Moves the AF area of the viewfinder

according to the distance you drag the

touch pad (→42).

[OFF] —

• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position. If you press the

[DISP.] button before determining the focus position, the focus position returns to the

center.

• To cancel the settings for the AF area when the Auto Focus Mode (→92) is set to

[ ] (Face/Eye Detection), [ ] (tracking), or [ ] (49-area-focusing), press

[MENU/SET].

●The Touch Shutter function (→43) is disabled when using [Touch Pad AF].

●The [Touch Pad AF] does not function in the following cases:

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

• When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

102 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Auto Focus

Optimizing the focus and brightness for a touched position

Recording mode:

→ [Custom] → [Touch Settings] → [Touch AF] → [AF+AE]

1Touch the subject you want to optimize the brightness

for

• The AF area setting screen appears. (→98)

• The brightness optimization position is displayed on the center of

the AF area. The position follows the movement of the AF area.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively for the

[Touch AE].

• Touching [Reset] returns the brightness optimization position and

the AF area to the center.

SetSet

ResetReset

2Touch [Set]

• The AF area with the same function as [ ] is displayed on the touched position.

• If you touch [ ] (touch [ ] when [ ] is set), the setting of [AF+AE] is canceled.

When the background has become too bright, etc., the

brightness contrast with the background can be adjusted by

compensating the exposure.

●When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimized for the touched

position before recording takes place.

●At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched

location.

●The [AF+AE] does not function in the following cases:

• When using the Digital Zoom

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

103 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking close-up pictures (Macro recording)

Recording mode:

This mode allows you to take close-up pictures of a subject, e.g. when taking pictures of

flowers.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[ ]

([AF Macro])

You can take pictures of a subject as close as 3 cm (0.098 feet) from the

lens by rotating the zoom lever upmost to Wide.

[ ]

([Macro Zoom])

Use this setting to get close to the subject and then further enlarge when

taking the picture. You can take a picture with the Digital Zoom up to 3x

while maintaining the distance to the subject for the extreme Wide position

(3 cm (0.098 feet)).

• Note that enlarging will decrease picture quality.

• Zoom range will be displayed in blue (digital zoom range).

●When recording a subject close to the camera, we recommend taking a picture without using the

flash.

●A picture may be out of focus when the subject is out of focus range, even if the focus display is lit.

●When a nearby subject is to be recorded

• Using a tripod and [Self Timer] (→132) is recommended.

• The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance

between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become

difficult to focus on it again.

• Resolution may be slightly reduced around the edges of the picture. This is not a malfunction.

●Cannot set to [Macro Zoom] in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• Panorama Shot Mode

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

104 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Recording mode:

Manual Focus is convenient when you want to lock the focus to take pictures or when it is

difficult to adjust focus using Auto Focus.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select [MF] and press

[MENU/SET]

3Turn the control ring to adjust focus

Turning the control ring to the right:

Focusing on a nearby subject

Turning the control ring to the left:

Focusing on a distant subject

MF Assist (Enlarged screen)

MF Guide (→189)

Peaking

• Color is added to the portions of the image that are in

focus. (Peaking) (→190)

• When [MF Assist] is set to [ON], MF Assist (enlarged

screen) is displayed (→189). You can move the

enlarged part by dragging the screen (→42).

• You can also enlarge the display by pinching out or

touching the screen twice. (→42)

105 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Manual Focus

Operation Touch operation Description

Drag Moves the enlarged area.

—Pinch in /

Pinch out Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

—Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.

—

Switches the enlarged display. (windowed/full screen)*

[DISP.] [Reset] Resets the area to be enlarged back to the center.

* The image of a part of the screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 6 times. The

image of the entire screen can be enlarged or reduced approximately 3 to 10 times.

4Press the shutter button halfway

• The recording screen will be displayed.

• The same operation can be performed by pressing [MENU/SET].

Quickly adjusting the focus using Auto Focus

In Manual Focus, the focus can be set on the subject through Auto Focus.

1Touch [ ]

• Auto Focus is activated at the center of the frame.

• Auto Focus also works with the following operations.

– Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assigned

– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position

you want to focus on

• This function cannot be used when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

106 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures by locking the focus and/or exposure

(AF/AE Lock)

Recording mode:

The AF/AE Lock function is convenient, for example, when there is too much contrast with

the subject and you cannot get appropriate exposure (AE Lock) or when you want to take

a still picture composed with the subject outside the AF area (AF Lock).

Preparation

Assign [AF/AE LOCK] to the function button. (→48)

1Point the camera at the subject

2Lock the focus and/or exposure while you press and hold the

function button

• When you release the function button, the focus and/or exposure lock is canceled.

3While you press and hold the function button, move the

camera to compose the picture you want to take and fully

press the shutter button

■Setting the function of [AF/AE LOCK]

→ [Custom] → [AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK] Locks exposure only.

• [AEL] is displayed when the correct exposure is achieved.

[AF LOCK] Locks focus only.

• [AFL] is displayed when the subject comes into focus.

[AF/AE LOCK]

Locks focus and exposure.

• [AFL] and [AEL] are displayed when the subject is in focus and the correct

exposure is achieved.

[AF-ON] Auto Focus is activated.

●AE Lock is disabled in Manual Exposure Mode.

●AF Lock is disabled during Manual Focus.

●Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

107 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Taking pictures with Exposure Compensation

Recording mode:

Corrects the exposure when there is a backlight or when the subject is too dark or too

bright.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Rotate the control dial to compensate the

exposure

Exposure Bracket

Exposure Compensation

• Press to set the exposure bracket. (→134)

OFF

Under-exposed Optimum

exposure Over-exposed

Adjust the

exposure to the [+]

direction

Adjust the

exposure to the [-]

direction

3Press [MENU/SET] to set

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

●You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between –5 EV and +5 EV.

Settings can be made within a range of –3 EV to +3 EV while recording motion pictures, recording

4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].

●Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.

●When the exposure value is out of the –3 EV to +3 EV range, the brightness of the recording

screen will no longer change. It is recommended to record by checking the actual brightness of the

recorded image in the Auto Review or playback screen.

●The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When [Exposure

Comp. Reset] (→202) is set to [OFF])

108 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Recording mode:

Set ISO sensitivity (sensitivity to lighting).

We recommend higher settings to take clear pictures in darker locations.

→ [Rec] → [Sensitivity]

1Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the

control dial

ISO sensitivity

AUTO ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 (with the flash

on: 1600) depending on the brightness of a subject.*1

(Intelligent ISO)

ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200 (with the flash

on: 1600) depending on the movement and brightness of a subject.*1

• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed

halfway. It is continuously changing to match the movement of the

subject until the shutter button is pressed fully.

From 80 to 3200,

H.6400*2ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected setting.

*1 When [ISO Limit Set] (→178) is set, the ISO sensitivity is automatically set in the range up to

the [ISO Limit Set] setting value.

*2 Only when [Extended ISO] is [ON].

2Press [MENU/SET] to set

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

109 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Setting guide

ISO sensitivity [80] [3200]

Location

(recommended)

Bright

(outdoors) Dark

Shutter speed Slow Fast

Interference Low High

Subject blur High Low

●For details on the available flash range used when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], refer to

(→148).

●Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:

• Shutter-Priority AE Mode

• Manual Exposure Mode

●You can use the following settings in the Creative Video Mode, when recording 4K photos, or

when recording using [Post Focus].

– [AUTO], [80] - [3200]

110 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Recording mode:

In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the color of white

takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the color of white which is closest to

what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.

→ [Rec] → [White Balance]

1Rotate the control dial to select the White Balance

[AWB]Automatic adjustment in accordance with the light source.

[ ] Adjust to the color under a clear sky.

[ ] Adjust to the color under a cloudy sky.

[ ] Adjust to the color in the shade.

[ ] Adjust to the color under incandescent lights.

[ ]*Adjust to the color that is optimal for taking pictures using the flash.

[ ]/[ ]/

[ ]/[ ]

Use the White Balance value that was set manually.

Press

Point the camera at a white object such as a piece of paper, ensuring that it is

inside the frame at the center of the screen, and press the shutter button

• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.

• It may not be possible to set the correct White Balance if subjects are too

bright or too dark.

[ ]

You can set the White Balance using color temperature.

Press

Use to select the color temperature value and

press [MENU/SET]

• You can set the color temperature from [2500K] to

[10000K].

* The [AWB] setting is applied while recording motion pictures, recording 4K photos, or

recording in [Post Focus].

2Press [MENU/SET] to set

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

111 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixtures, etc., the optimal White Balance will vary

depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

●The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a flash and the subject is

recorded outside of the effective flash range (→148).

●In the Scene Guide Mode, settings suitable for each scene are made.

●In Scene Guide Mode, changing the scene or recording mode will return White Balance settings

(including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back to [AWB].

■Auto White Balance

When [AWB] (Automatic White Balance) is set, the coloring is adjusted in accordance

with the light source. However, if the scene is too bright or too dark or if other extreme

conditions apply, the pictures may appear reddish or bluish. The White Balance may not

operate correctly if there is a multiple number of light sources. In that case, set the [White

Balance] to settings other than [AWB] to adjust the coloring.

: [AWB] operational range

10000K

9000K

8000K

7000K

6000K

5000K

4000K

3000K

2000K

Cloudy sky (rain)

Shade

Incandescent lighting

Sunset/sunrise

Candlelight

Sunlight

White fluorescent lighting

Blue sky

K=Kelvin Color Temperature

112 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Performing White Balance fine adjustments

White Balance settings can be individually fine-tuned if colors still do not appear as

anticipated.

1In step 1 of “Adjusting the White Balance” (→110),

select the White Balance and press

2Use to perform White Balance fine

adjustments

: A (amber: orangish colors) : B (blue: bluish colors)

: G (green: greenish colors) : M (magenta: reddish colors)

• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White

Balance graph.

• Pressing [DISP.] button resets the position back to the center.

3Press [MENU/SET]

4Press [MENU/SET] to finalize the setting

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.

●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the A (amber) or B (blue) side,

the color of the White Balance icon displayed on the screen will change to the fine-tuned color.

●When you perform fine adjustments of the White Balance toward the G (green) or M (magenta)

side, [+] (green) or [-] (magenta) will be displayed in the White Balance icon on the screen.

113 DVQP1285

Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Bracket recording using White Balance

Bracket settings are performed based on the fine adjustment values for White Balance,

and three pictures with different coloring are automatically recorded when the shutter

button is pressed once.

1Perform fine adjustments of the White Balance in

step 2 of “Performing White Balance fine adjustments”

(→112) and rotate the control dial to perform the

Bracket setting

• You can also set the bracket by touching [ ]/[ ].

BKTBKT

2Press [MENU/SET]

3Press [MENU/SET] to finalize the setting

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set the White Balance.

●You can also set the White Balance Bracket in [Bracket] in the [Rec] menu. (→133)

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

114 DVQP1285

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting

pictures to save

Recording with the 4K Photo function

Recording mode:

You can take burst pictures of approximately 8 million pixels with a burst rate of 30 fps.

You can select and save a frame from the burst file.

• To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→27)

1Press [ ] button

• The same operation can be performed by pressing

the [ ] button ( ), using to select a 4K photo

icon, and pressing .

2Press to select the recording method

and press [MENU/SET]

• The recording method can also be set from

[4K PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu.

[4K Burst]

For capturing the best shot of a fast-moving subject

(e.g., sports, aeroplanes, trains)

Audio recording: None

[4K Burst(S/S)]

“S/S” is an abbreviation

of “Start/Stop”.

For capturing unpredictable photo opportunities

(e.g., plants, animals, children)

Audio recording: Available*

[4K Pre-Burst]

For recording as needed whenever a photo opportunity arises

(e.g. the moment when a ball is thrown)

Audio recording: None

* Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.

4K Photo and Drive Settings

115 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

3Recording with the 4K Photo function

[4K Burst]

Press the shutter button halfway

Press and hold the shutter button fully for as long as you want to

perform recording

• Recording will start approximately 0.5 seconds after you press

the shutter button fully. Therefore, press the button fully slightly in

advance.

Press and hold

Recording is performed

[4K Burst(S/S)]

“S/S” is an

abbreviation of

“Start/Stop”.

Press the shutter button fully

• Recording will start.

Press the shutter button fully again

• Recording will stop.

Start (First)

Stop (Second)

Recording is performed

When you press the [Fn1] button while recording, you can add a

marker. (Up to 40 markers for each recording.) When selecting and

saving pictures from a 4K burst file, you can skip to the positions

where you added markers.

116 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

[4K Pre-Burst]

Press the shutter button fully

• The camera adjusts the focus continuously when using Auto Focus.

Except when in Manual Exposure Mode, it also adjusts the exposure

continuously.

• Images may not be displayed as smoothly as when recording with the

normal recording screen.

Approximately 1 second

Recording is performed

In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as

when the subject is not at the center, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (→106)

• Burst pictures are saved as a single 4K burst file in the MP4 format.

• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed

automatically. To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display

the recording screen.

• For information on how to select and save pictures from 4K burst files, refer to

(→117).

• When using [Light Composition] (→213), we recommend using a tripod and taking

pictures remotely by connecting the camera to a smartphone to prevent camera

shake. (→233).

■To cancel the 4K Photo functions

In step 2, select [ ].

• The operation can be canceled by pressing the [ ] button ( ) and then selecting

[ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

Battery drainage and camera temperature

●If the surrounding temperature is high or 4K photos are recorded continuously, [ ] may be

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through. Wait until the camera cools down.

●When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) is set, the battery drains faster and the camera temperature rises.

(to protect itself, the camera may switch to [ ] ([4K Burst]))

Select [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.

117 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file and saving

This section describes how to select pictures from a 4K burst file and save them.

For details on how to record 4K burst files, refer to (→114).

1Select a picture with the [ ] on the playback screen,

and press

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

• In the case of recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]), proceed to

the step 3.

2Drag the slide bar to perform rough scene selection

• For information on how to operate the slide view screen, refer to

(→118).

• If you touch [ ] (or press the [Fn2] button), you can choose a

scene in the 4K burst playback screen. (→119)

Slide view screen

3Drag to select the frame you want to save as a picture

• The same operation can be performed using .

4Touch [ ] to save the picture

• The selected picture will be saved as a new picture in the JPEG format separate from the 4K

burst file.

• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its shutter

speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.

If you use [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] in the [Playback] menu, you can bulk save 5 seconds’

worth of 4K recording. (→212)

118 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

Position of the displayed frame

Operation Touch operation Description

Drag

Selects the frame you want to save as a picture

• You can select a frame from 60 frames (continuous burst

time of approximately 2 seconds).

Select

with

→ [MENU/SET]

Displays the previous or next 45 frames

• Pressing the same button again will display the frames

following the next ones or the ones preceding the previous

ones.

—Touch / Drag

Selects the frames to be displayed

• Frames preceding and following the selected frame will be

displayed.

Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the display

Drag Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)

[Fn1] Switches to marker operation

[Fn2] Displays the 4K burst playback screen

— / Adds/deletes a marker

—

In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] → [ ] ([LOW]) →

[ ] ([HIGH]). (→190)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture

• During marker operation, you can skip to the markers that you added or the beginning or end of the

4K burst file. Press [Fn1] button again to return to the original operation.

Operation Touch operation Description

Moves to the next marker.

Moves to the previous marker.

119 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

<4K burst playback screen>

During pause During continuous playback

Operation Touch operation Description

/ Continuous playback / Pause (during continuous playback)

/ Continuous rewind / Pause (during continuous rewind)

/ Fast forward playback / Single-frame forward (while paused)

/ Fast rewind playback / Single-frame rewind (while paused)

—Touch / Drag Selects the frames to be displayed (while paused)

Pinch out /

Pinch in Enlarges/reduces the display (while paused)

Drag Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display)

[Fn1] Switches to marker operation (→118)

[Fn2] Displays the slide view screen (while paused)

— / Adds/deletes a marker

—

In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] → [ ] ([LOW]) →

[ ] ([HIGH]). (→190)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture (while paused)

●If you touch the screen twice, the screen will be enlarged. To return to the original display, touch

the enlarged screen twice.

120 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

■Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen

• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO] or [4K]. When connecting to a TV that does not

support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].

• Set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

• If you connect the camera to a TV and display 4K burst files on the TV, they will be

displayed only on the 4K burst playback screen.

• Even if you insert the SD card to a 4K-compatible TV with an SD card slot, you cannot

play back 4K burst files recorded with [Aspect Ratio] set to an option other than [16:9].

(As of May 2017)

121 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

Notes on the 4K Photo function

■To change the aspect ratio

Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 4K

photos.

■To record the subject with reduced blur

You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.

Set mode dial to [ ]

Set the shutter speed by rotating the control dial

• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions: 1/1000 seconds or

faster.

• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may increase the

noise on the screen.

■Shutter sound for 4K photo recording

When using [ ] ([4K Burst]) or [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]), you can change the electronic

shutter sound settings in [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone]. (→198)

When recording with [ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]), you can set the start/stop tone volume in

[Beep Volume].

• You can perform high speed burst recording quietly using the 4K Photo function in

combination with [Silent Mode]. (→186)

■Scenes not suitable for the 4K Photo function

Recording indoors

When recording under fluorescent lighting or LED lighting fixtures, etc., the colors and

brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen. The striping may

be reduced by setting a slower shutter speed.

Fast-moving subjects

Subjects moving fast may appear distorted when recorded.

122 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

■The camera’s setup for the 4K Photo function

The camera’s setup is automatically optimized for 4K photo recording.

• The following settings are fixed.

[Picture Size]

[4K] (8M)

[4:3]: 3328×2496 [3:2]: 3504×2336

[16:9]: 3840×2160 [1:1]: 2880×2880

[Quality] [ ]

[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]

[Rec Format]*[MP4]

[Rec Quality]*[4K/100M/30p]

[Continuous AF]*[ON]

* Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 4K burst files recorded with the 4K Photo

function.

• The following limitations apply to the recording functions indicated below.

[ ] ([4K Burst])/

[ ] ([4K Burst(S/S)]) [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

Program Shift Disabled

Exposure compensation –3 EV to +3 EV

Shutter speed 1/30 to 1/16000

[AFS/AFF/AFC] ([AFF]) Disabled

[AF Mode] ([ ]) Disabled

[MF Assist]○Disabled

White Balance ([ ]) Disabled

ISO sensitivity [AUTO], 80 to 3200

Flash Disabled

Bracket recording Disabled

• The following menu items are disabled:

[Rec]

[Picture Size], [Quality], [Bracket], [iHandheld Night Shot], [iHDR], [HDR],

[Panorama Settings], [Shutter Type], [Flash Adjust.], [Extended ISO],

[Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]

[Custom] [Rec Area]

[Setup] [Economy] (Only [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]))

123 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording with the 4K Photo function and selecting pictures to save

●Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.

When using an SDHC memory card, files are split into smaller picture files for recording and

playback if the file size exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue to record pictures without interruption.)

If using an SDXC memory card, you can record pictures in a single file even if the size is greater

than 4 GB.

●When recording, the angle of view becomes narrower.

●The following changes occur when recording 4K photos:

• The [i.Resolution] setting changes from [EXTENDED] to [LOW].

• [Destination] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.

• [Simultaneous record w/o filter] is not available.

●When recording using the [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) function, [Step Zoom] does not operate.

●Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion pictures.

●The 4K Photo function is disabled when using the following settings:

• [Clear in Backlight], [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld

Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

●To select and save pictures from 4K burst files on a PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

(→268) Please note that it is not possible to edit a 4K burst file as a motion picture.

124 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Adjusting the focus after recording

([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking])

Recording mode:

You can record 4K burst pictures while changing the focus point and then select a focus

point after recording.

This function is best for non-moving subjects.

You can select multiple focus points and combine them into one picture. ([Focus

Stacking])

4K burst recording with

automatic focus shift

Touch the desired focus

point

Finished picture has the

desired focus point

• To record pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→27)

• We recommend using a tripod to perform [Focus Stacking].

Recording using [Post Focus]

1Press [ ] button

2Press to select [ON] and press [MENU/SET]

[Post Focus] icon

• You can also set it to [ON] by pressing the [ ] button ( ), using to select a [Post

Focus] icon ([ ]).

3Determine the composition and press the shutter

button halfway

• Auto Focus activates and automatically detects the focus point

on the screen.

• If there is no focus point on the screen, the Focus indicator ( )

blinks and you cannot record.

From halfway pressing the shutter button to completion of recording

• Do not change the distance to subject or the composition.

125 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Adjusting the focus after recording ([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking])

4Press the shutter button fully to start recording

Recording progress bar

• The focus point changes automatically while recording. When the

recording progress bar disappears, recording automatically ends.

• The data will be saved as a single file in the MP4 format.

• If [Auto Review] is set, a screen will automatically appear that lets

you select the focus point. (→126)

■Canceling [Post Focus]

Select [OFF] in step 2.

• The operation can be canceled by pressing the [ ] button ( ) and then selecting

[ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

About camera temperature

If the surrounding temperature is high or [Post Focus] recording is performed continuously, [ ] may

be displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through. Wait until the camera cools down.

126 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Adjusting the focus after recording ([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking])

Select the focus point and save the picture ([Post Focus])

1On the playback screen, select the image with the

[ ] icon and press

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2Touch the focus point

• If there are no pictures with the focus on the selected point, a red

frame will be displayed, and pictures cannot be saved.

• The edge of the screen cannot be selected.

Operation Touch operation Description

Touch Selects focus point

• No selection can be made while display is enlarged.

Enlarges the display

Reduces the display (when in enlarged display)

[Fn1] Switches to [Focus Stacking] operation (→127)

[Fn2]

In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] → [ ] ([LOW])

→ [ ] ([HIGH]). (→190)

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture

• You can make fine adjustments to the focus by dragging the

slide bar during enlarged display. (The same operation can be

performed using .)

3Touch [ ] to save the picture

• The selected picture will be saved as a new separate file in the JPEG format.

127 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Adjusting the focus after recording ([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking])

Select the focus range to combine and create a single picture

([Focus Stacking])

Near Focus Distant

1Touch [ ] on screen in step 2 of “Select the focus point and save the picture

([Post Focus])” (→126)

• The same operation can be performed by pressing the [Fn1] button.

2Choose a stacking method and touch it

[Auto Merging]

Automatically select photos suitable for stacking and combine them into one

picture.

• Choose by giving preference to near-focus pictures.

• Perform the focus stacking and save the picture.

[Range Merging] Combine the pictures with the selected focus position into one picture.

(When selecting [Range Merging])

3Touch the focus point

• Select positions at two or more points.

• Focus points between the selected two positions will be

selected.

• Positions that cannot be selected, or that would produce an

unnatural result will be grayed out.

• Touch a position again to deselect it.

• If you drag the screen you can then continue to select positions.

Operation Touch operation Description

Touch Select the position

[Fn2] [Set/Cancel] Set/Clear the position

[DISP.]

[All] Select all positions (Before

selecting position)

[Reset] Deselect All (After selecting

position)

[MENU/SET] Combine and save picture

ResetReset

Set/CancelSet/Cancel

ResetReset

Set/CancelSet/Cancel

128 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Adjusting the focus after recording ([Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking])

4Touch [ ] to combine and save the picture

• The picture will be saved in JPEG format with recording information (Exif information) from the

nearest position’s picture, including its shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.

Notes on the [Post Focus]/[Focus Stacking]

■The camera’s setup for recording in [Post Focus]

• Since recording is performed in the same picture quality as 4K photos, certain

limitations apply to recording functions and menu settings. For details, refer to “The

camera’s setup for the 4K Photo function” (→122).

• In addition to the limitations of the 4K Photo function, the following limitations apply to

[Post Focus] recording:

– [AF Mode] and [AFS/AFF/AFC] cannot be set.

– Manual Focus cannot be used.

– Motion pictures cannot be recorded.

– [Digital Zoom] is not available.

●During recording, the angle of view will be narrower.

●The [Post Focus] function is disabled when using the following settings:

• [Clear in Backlight], [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld

Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

●When selecting the focus and saving pictures, you cannot select and save the picture from a TV

screen even if the camera is connected to a TV through an HDMI micro cable.

●In the following cases, [Focus Stacking] may produce an unnatural picture:

• If the subject is in motion

• If there are large differences in distance to the subject

• If there is significant blurring (recording with a larger aperture might make the picture less

unnatural)

●During focus stacking, auto compensation is applied to deviations among pictures due to camera

shake. In such cases, the angle of view will be slightly narrower at the time of focus stacking.

●Only pictures taken using [Post Focus] on this camera are eligible for [Focus Stacking].

129 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

Recording mode:

You can switch the operation to be performed when you press the shutter button.

1Press [ ] button ( )

2Press to select the drive mode and

press [MENU/SET]

Drive Mode

[Single] When the shutter button is pressed,

only one picture is recorded.

[Burst] (→130) The pictures are recorded in succession

while the shutter button is pressed.

[4K PHOTO]

(→114)

When the shutter button is pressed, a

picture is recorded with the 4K Photo

function.

[Post Focus]

(→124)

When the shutter button is pressed, the

pictures are recorded with [Post Focus].

[Self Timer]

(→132)

When the shutter button is pressed,

recording takes place after the set time

has elapsed.

■To cancel the drive mode

In step 2, select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].

• You can cancel the self-timer by turning off the camera. (When [Self Timer Auto Off]

(→202) is set to [ON].)

130 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

Burst function

■Setting [Burst Rate]

After selecting [Burst] and pressing in step 2 (→129), select the burst rate with ,

and press [MENU/SET]

[H]

(High speed)

[M]

(Middle speed)

[L]

(Low speed)

Speed (pictures/sec.) [AFS] 10 5 2

[AFF] / [AFC] 552

Live View during burst recording None Available Available

Number of

recordable pictures*1

With RAW files 10 10 10

Without RAW files 31 100 or more 100 or more

*1 The number of burst pictures is limited by the picture-taking conditions and the type and/or status

of the card used. Pictures can be taken until the card becomes full. However, the burst speed will

become slower halfway through the recording. The exact time when the slower burst speed will

start depends on the settings of the aspect ratio, picture size, and quality as well as the type of card

used.

Focusing in burst mode

Focusing varies depending on the [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu (→91) and the setting of [Focus/

Release Priority] (→188) in the [Custom] menu.

[AFS/AFF/AFC] [Focus/Release Priority] Focus

[AFS] [FOCUS] At the first picture

[RELEASE]

[AFF] / [AFC]*2[FOCUS] Normal focusing*3

[RELEASE] Predicted focusing*4

*2 Focus is fixed in the first picture when dark subjects are recorded.

*3 Since the camera records a burst of pictures while it adjusts the focus, the burst speed may be

slower.

*4 The camera predicts the focus within a possible range by giving higher priority to the burst speed.

131 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

●The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings:

[Sensitivity], [Picture Size], [Quality], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Focus/Release Priority]

●When the burst speed is set to [H] ([AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS] or the focus

mode is set to [MF]), the exposure and White Balance are fixed to those of the first picture.

When the burst speed is set to [H] ([AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFF] or [AFC]), [M], or

[L], the exposure and White Balance are adjusted individually for each still picture.

●It may take a while to store still pictures that were taken using the burst function. If you

continue to record while storing, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be

reduced. A high-speed card is recommended when recording using the burst function.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• In Self Shot Mode

• When recording using the flash

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

132 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Selecting a Drive Mode

Taking pictures with self-timer

■Setting the self-timer operation

After selecting [Self Timer] and pressing in step 2 (→129), select the self-timer

operation with , and press [MENU/SET]

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 10 seconds and three pictures are taken at intervals of

approximately 2 seconds.

The shutter is activated after 2 seconds. This is also effective for preventing jitter when

pressing the shutter button.

●After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording will start.

●The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

●We recommend using a tripod.

●It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases:

• When recording using [Bracket]

• When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode (When taking pictures in Self Shot Mode, you can set the Self-timer in

[Countdown] (→59))

• During motion picture recording

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

133 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting

Automatically (Bracket Recording)

Recording mode:

You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting by pressing the

shutter button.

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Rec] → [Bracket] → [Bracket Type]

(Exposure Bracket)

Press the shutter button to perform recording while adjusting

the exposure. (→134)

(White Balance Bracket)

Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with

different white balance settings automatically. (→113)

2Press to select [More settings] and then press [MENU/SET]

• For information on [More settings], refer to the page that describes each function.

• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.

3Focus on the subject and take a picture

• When Exposure Bracket is selected, the bracket display flashes until all of the

pictures you have set are taken. If you change the bracket settings or turn off

the camera before all of the pictures you have set are taken, the camera restarts

recording from the first picture.

■To cancel [Bracket]

Select [OFF] in step 1.

●Bracket recording is disabled in the following cases.

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower]

(Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

• In Self Shot Mode

• When recording using the flash (except for White Balance Bracket)

• When recording motion pictures

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

134 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting Automatically (Bracket Recording)

Exposure Bracket

■About [More settings] (step 2 in (→133))

[Step]

Sets the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure compensation

range.

[ ] (Takes three pictures with an interval of 1/3 EV) to [ ]

(Takes seven pictures with an interval of 1 EV)

[Sequence] Sets the order in which pictures are taken.

[Single Shot Setting]*

[ ]: Takes one picture each time you press the shutter button.

[ ]: Takes all the pictures set to be taken when you press the shutter

button once.

* Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the shutter

button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures are taken.

[Step]: [ ], [Sequence]: [0/–/+]

1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

±0 EV –1/3 EV +1/3 EV

●When taking pictures using Exposure Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value, the

pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.

135 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals

[Time Lapse Shot]

Recording mode:

You can preset data such as recording start time and time lapse to take still pictures

automatically. This setting is convenient for taking pictures at constant intervals for

landscape scenes, observation of the gradual changes in animals/plants, and other

applications. The pictures are recorded as a set of group pictures (→166).

•Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→30)

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Rec] → [Time Lapse Shot]

[Start Time] [Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter

button.

[Start Time Set] Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can

be set.

Press to select the item (hour and/or

minute), and to set the start time, and press

[MENU/SET]

[Shooting Interval] /

[Image Count]

The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.

: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)

: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

• The camera may not be able to record using the preset interval and number of

pictures to be recorded under some recording conditions.

2Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

3Press the shutter button fully

• The recording starts automatically.

• During recording standby, the camera turns off automatically when no operation

is performed for a preset interval. The [Time Lapse Shot] recording will continue

even if the camera is turned off, and the camera is automatically turned on at the

recording start time. If you want to turn on the camera manually, press the shutter

button halfway.

• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)

Operation Touch operation Description

[Fn1]

Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop

the recording

Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or stop

the recording (during pause)

136 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Taking pictures automatically at set intervals [Time Lapse Shot]

4Select the motion picture creation method

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[Frame Rate] Set the number of frames per second. The higher the number is, the

smoother the motion picture will be.

[Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

5Press to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also create a motion picture using [Time Lapse Video] in the [Playback]

menu. (→217)

●This function is not intended for application-specific systems (monitoring cameras).

●When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the

camera in place with a tripod or by other means.

●[Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases:

• When the remaining battery power runs out

• Turning the camera off

If this occurs during [Time Lapse Shot] recording, you can restart the operation by turning off the

camera, replacing the battery or card in the pause state, and then turning the camera on. (Note,

however, that the pictures recorded after restarting the operation are saved as a separate set of

group pictures.)

●We recommend using auto focus for time lapse recording in cases where a long [Shooting

Interval] is set and the camera will turn off automatically between shots.

●When creating motion pictures at a picture quality size of [4K], recording times are limited to

29 minutes and 59 seconds.

If using an SDHC memory card, you will not be able to create motion pictures with a file size

greater than 4 GB. With an SDXC memory card, you can create motion pictures with a file size

greater than 4 GB.

●When creating a motion picture with a picture quality size of [FHD] or [HD], you will be unable to

create it if the recording time is more than 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size is greater

than 4 GB.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

137 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

Recording mode:

You can stitch still pictures to create stop motion animation. The pictures are recorded as

a set of group pictures (→166).

•Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→30)

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Rec] → [Stop Motion Animation]

[Auto Shooting] [ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.

[OFF]: Takes pictures manually, one frame at a time.

[Shooting Interval] (Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])

Set the interval used for [Auto Shooting].

2Press to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

3Press to select [New] and press

[MENU/SET]

4Press the shutter button fully

• Up to 9,999 frames can be recorded.

5Move the subject to decide on the

composition

• Repeat the recording of still pictures in the same way.

• When you turn off the camera during recording, a message to restart recording

will appear when you turn on the camera.

How to create stop motion animation effectively

●Up to two previously recorded pictures are displayed on the recording screen. Check this screen as

a guideline for determining the amount of required motion.

●You can press [ ] (Playback) button to check the recorded pictures. Press [ ] button to delete

unnecessary pictures. To return to the recording screen, press [ ] (Playback) button again.

138 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

6Touch [ ] to end the recording

• You can also end the recording by selecting [Stop

Motion Animation] in the [Rec] menu, and then

pressing [MENU/SET].

• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on

the confirmation screen. (If you select [Pause], press

the shutter button fully to resume recording.)

7Select a method to create a stop motion animation

• [Rec Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality] Sets the picture quality of the motion picture.

[Frame Rate] Set the number of frames per second. The higher the number is, the

smoother the motion picture will be.

[Sequence] [NORMAL]: Stitches the still pictures in the recording sequence.

[REVERSE]: Stitches the still pictures in the reverse order of recording.

8Press to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also create a stop motion animation using [Stop Motion Video] in the

[Playback] menu. (→218)

■Adding pictures to an already recorded stop motion animation group

When you select [Additional] in step 3, group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] are displayed. Select a set of group pictures and press [MENU/SET]. Then,

select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.

139 DVQP1285

4K Photo and Drive Settings

Creating stop motion animation [Stop Motion Animation]

●[Auto Shooting] may not be performed according to the preset interval because recording could

take time under some recording conditions, such as when pictures are taken using a flash.

●When creating motion pictures at a picture quality size of [4K], recording times are limited to

29 minutes and 59 seconds.

If using an SDHC memory card, you will not be able to create motion pictures with a file size

greater than 4 GB. With an SDXC memory card, you can create motion pictures with a file size

greater than 4 GB.

●When creating a motion picture with a picture quality size of [FHD] or [HD], you will be unable to

create it if the recording time is more than 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size is greater

than 4 GB.

●You cannot select only one recorded still picture using [Additional].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

●[Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] cannot be used in the following case:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

140 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

Recording mode:

Automatically detects and prevents jitter.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [Stabilizer]

(Normal) Corrects vertical and horizontal jitter.

(Panning)

Corrects vertical jitter. This setting is ideal for panning (technique of recording a

subject by matching the camera movement with the movement of a subject going

in a specific direction).

[OFF] [Stabilizer] does not work.

To prevent jitter

If a warning is displayed about jitter, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, or [Self Timer].

●Using a slower shutter speed can cause motion blur. Shutter speed will be

slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the

moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.

We recommend using a tripod.

• [Slow Sync.]

• [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape],

[Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Clear Night Portrait]

(Scene Guide Mode)

60p

141 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Correcting jitter

●When you use a tripod, we recommend setting [Stabilizer] to [OFF].

●[Stabilizer] cannot be used by selecting [ ] (Normal) in Panorama Shot Mode.

●In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]

(Panning):

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

●[Stabilizer] cannot be used when recording with [High Speed Video].

●The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function automatically functions while recording motion

pictures. This decreases the jitter of the image when recording motion pictures while zooming or

walking, etc.

• The recording range may become narrower.

• The 5-axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function is not available when recording motion pictures with

[Rec Quality] set to [4K/100M/30p], or recording using [4K Live Cropping].

●Cases where the stabilizer function may be ineffective:

• When there is a lot of jitter

• When the zoom magnification is high (also in the Digital Zoom range)

• When taking pictures while following a moving subject

• When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places

●The panning effect by selecting [ ] is not fully achieved in the following cases:

• Bright summer days or other bright locations

• When the shutter speed is higher than 1/100 seconds

• When the motion of a subject is slow and the speed with which the camera is moved is too slow

(a nice background blur is not achieved)

• When the camera is not adequately tracking the motion of a subject

142 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Zoom types and use

Optical Zoom

Recording mode:

You can zoom in without degrading the picture quality.

Maximum magnification: 30x

●This function is not available in the following case:

• When recording with [Macro Zoom]

Extended optical zoom

Recording mode:

This function works when picture sizes with [ ] have been selected in [Picture Size]

(→173). Extended optical zoom allows you to zoom in using a higher zoom ratio than

Optical Zoom, without degrading the picture quality. The maximum zoom ratio varies

depending on the picture size.

Maximum magnification: 59.2x (Including the optical zoom ratio.)

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When recording with [Macro Zoom]

• During motion picture recording

143 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

[i.Zoom]

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio up

to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [i.Zoom]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When [Picture Size] is set to [S], the zoom ratio can be increased to up to 1.5x the original zoom

ratio.

●[i.Zoom] works automatically in Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)

• When recording with [Macro Zoom]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]

• When [iHDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

144 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

[Digital Zoom]

Recording mode:

Zoom 4x further than Optical/Extended optical zoom. When [Digital Zoom] is used

simultaneously with [i.Zoom], you can only increase the zoom ratio up to 2x.

Note that, with Digital Zoom, enlarging will decrease picture quality.

→ [Rec] / [Motion Picture] → [Digital Zoom]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (→132) for taking

pictures.

●The AF area is largely displayed at the center in the Digital Zoom range.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

•When [Live View Mode] is set to [ECO 30fps] (setting at the time of purchase)

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Impressive Art], [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

The illustration is an example of when using Optical Zoom, [i.Zoom], and [Digital Zoom] in Program AE

Mode.

Focus range

Optical Zoom range

i.Zoom range

Digital Zoom range

Current zoom position (Focal lengths the same as those of a 35 mm film camera)

145 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Using Zoom

Using the zoom by performing touch operations (Touch zoom)

1Touch [ ]

2Touch [ ]

• The slide bar is displayed.

3Perform zoom operations by dragging the slide

bar

• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched position.

[ ] / [ ] Slow zooming

[ ] / [ ] Fast zooming

• Touch [ ] again to end touch zoom operations.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

146 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures with flash

Changing Flash Mode

Recording mode:

Set the flash to match the recording.

1Press [ ] button ( )

: [Auto]

: Auto*

The flash is automatically activated when the recording

conditions make it necessary.

: [Auto/Red-Eye]

The flash fires automatically to control red eye according to

recording conditions.

•Use this when you take pictures of people in low lighting

conditions.

: [Forced Flash On]

: [Forced On/Red-Eye]

The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording

conditions.

•Use this when your subject is back-lit or under

fluorescent light.

: [Slow Sync.]

: [Slow Sync./Red-Eye]

Takes brighter pictures such as pictures of subjects against a

nightscape by decreasing the shutter speed when firing a flash.

•Ideal for taking pictures of people against a nightscape.

•Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. We

recommend using a tripod.

: [Forced Flash Off]

The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.

•Use this when you take pictures in places where the use

of the flash is not permitted.

* This can be set only in Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]). The icon changes depending on the

type of subject and brightness.

The flash is activated twice. The interval between the first and second flash is

longer when [ ], [ ] or [ ] is set. The subject should not move until the

second flash is activated.

• The red-eye reduction effect varies depending on the subject and is affected by factors

such as distance from the subject and whether the subject is looking at the camera

during the preliminary flash. In some cases, red-eye reduction may be negligible.

147 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures with flash

■Flash settings for each Recording mode (○: Available, –: Not available)

Recording mode*1

Program AE Mode ○○○○○

Aperture-Priority AE Mode

Shutter-Priority AE Mode ○ ○ – – ○

Manual Exposure Mode

Scene Guide

Mode

(●: Default

settings)

[Clear Portrait] ○●*4– – ○

[Silky Skin] ○●*4– – ○

[Clear in Backlight] ●*2–––○

[Sweet Child’s Face] ○●*4– – ○

[Clear Night Portrait] – – – ● ○

[Soft Image of a Flower] ●*3–––○

[Appetizing Food] ●*3–––○

[Cute Dessert] ●*3–––○

[Freeze Animal Motion]●*3–––○

[Clear Sports Shot] ●*3–––○

[Monochrome] ●*3○○○○

*1 For details about flash settings in Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), refer to (→54).

*2 Cannot be set to [ ].

*3 Default setting is [ ].

*4 Default setting is [ ].

●The flash is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off) in the following cases:

• [Backlit Softness], [Relaxing Tone], [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky],

[Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape],

[Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations],

[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When using the electronic shutter

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

• When a picture effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set

●The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.

148 DVQP1285

Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures with flash

■Shutter speeds for each flash mode

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1/60*1 - 1/2000

Flash Mode Shutter speed (seconds)

1 - 1/16000

4*2 - 1/16000

*1 The shutter speed is set to 4 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and Manual Exposure Mode.

*2 The shutter speed is set to 30 seconds in [Artistic Nightscape] (Scene Guide Mode).

• In Intelligent Auto Mode ([ ] or [ ]), the shutter speed changes depending on the

detected scene.

■The available flash range

Edges of a picture may become slightly dark if using flash at short distances without using

zoom (close to max. Wide). This may be remedied by using a little zoom.

Max. Wide Max. Tele

Approx. 0.6 m - 5.6 m (2.0 feet - 18 feet) Approx. 2.0 m - 2.9 m (6.6 feet - 9.5 feet)

• These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Limit Set] is

set to [OFF].

●Avoid doing the following, as the heat or light could cause deformation or discoloration.

• Putting the flash close to objects

• Covering the flash with your hand as it is firing

●Flash charging may take time if battery is low or if using flash repeatedly. When the flash is being

charged, the flash icon flashes red, and you cannot take a picture even when you fully press the

shutter button.

Adjusting the flash output

Recording mode:

Adjust the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or too dark.

→ [Rec] → [Flash Adjust.]

1Press to set the flash output and press [MENU/SET]

Settings: –2 EV to +2 EV (unit: 1/3 EV)

When you do not want to adjust the intensity of the flash, select [±0 EV].

●When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash icon.

149 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Motion Picture/4K Motion Picture

Recording mode:

You can record full high-definition quality images that comply with the AVCHD standard,

as well as motion pictures recorded in MP4. You can also record a 4K motion picture in

MP4. (→151)

Audio is recorded in stereo.

1Press the motion picture button to start

recording

Recording state indicator

Elapsed recording time

Remaining recording time

• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each

motion picture mode is possible.

• Immediately release the motion picture button after

pressing it.

• While you are recording motion pictures, the recording

status indicator (red) will flash.

2Press the motion picture button again to

end recording

•With recording in a quiet environment, the

sound of aperture, focus and other actions may

be recorded in motion pictures. This is not a

malfunction.

The focus operation during recording of motion

pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF].

(→153)

About operation sound when recording ends

If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you, try the

following:

●Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the motion

picture using [Video Divide] (→217) in the [Playback] menu.

150 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Motion Picture/4K Motion Picture

●If the surrounding temperature is high, or a motion picture is recorded continuously, [ ] is

displayed and recording may be stopped halfway through. Wait until the camera cools down.

●Note that if you perform operations such as zoom, using buttons or dials, while recording a motion

picture, operation noise may be recorded.

●If Extended optical zoom is used before pressing the motion picture button, these settings will be

cleared, and the recordable area will be changed significantly.

●If the aspect ratio is different for still pictures and motion pictures, the angle of view will change

when starting to record a motion picture.

When you set [Rec Area] to [ ], the angle of view setting used for recording motion pictures is

displayed.

●The zoom speed will be slower than normal during motion picture recording.

●Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after

recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

●ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] (for motion pictures) while a motion picture is being recorded. You

can set ISO sensitivity and record motion pictures in Creative Video Mode.

●The below-mentioned motion picture recording modes are set in the following cases:

Selected Scene Guide Mode Recording mode at the time of

recording motion pictures

[Clear in Backlight] Portrait Mode

[Clear Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait] Low Light Mode

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] (Creative

Control Mode)

• When [Post Focus] is set

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

151 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Motion Picture/4K Motion Picture

Setting the format, picture size and recording frame rate

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Motion Picture] → [Rec Format]

[AVCHD] This is a data format suitable for playback on high-definition TVs.

[MP4] This data format is suited for playing back motion pictures on a computer and other

such devices.

2Use to select [Rec Quality] and press [MENU/SET]

When [AVCHD] is selected

[Rec Quality] Picture size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate

[FHD/28M/60p]*11920×1080 60p 60 fps 28 Mbps

[FHD/17M/60i] 1920×1080 60i 60 fps 17 Mbps

[FHD/24M/30p] 1920×1080 60i 30 fps 24 Mbps

When [MP4] is selected

[Rec Quality] Picture size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate

[4K/100M/30p]*23840×2160 30p 30 fps 100 Mbps

[FHD/28M/60p] 1920×1080 60p 60 fps 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/30p] 1920×1080 30p 30 fps 20 Mbps

[HD/10M/30p] 1280×720 30p 30 fps 10 Mbps

*1 AVCHD Progressive

*2 4K motion pictures

152 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Motion Picture/4K Motion Picture

• The quality becomes higher when the number of bit rate gets bigger. This unit uses the

“VBR” recording method, and the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the

subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast

movement is recorded.

• 4K motion picture cannot be set when using [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode).

• To record 4K motion pictures, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card. (→27)

• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion

pictures of other sizes.

• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K motion pictures are recorded at reduced Auto

Focus speeds. It may be difficult to focus on the subject with Auto Focus, but this is not

a malfunction.

• Limitations on continuous recording (→29)

■About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures

Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MP4] may be played back with poor picture or

sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with equipment

compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be displayed

properly.

• When you play back and import motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/60p] or

[FHD/24M/30p] in [AVCHD] using a device other than this unit, a compatible Blu-ray

disc recorder or PC installed with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268) is required.

• For details on motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/30p] in the [MP4] format, refer to

“Enjoying 4K motion pictures” (→262).

153 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Motion Picture/4K Motion Picture

Adjusting the focus while recording motion pictures

([Continuous AF])

Recording mode:

Focusing varies depending on the setting of focus and the setting of [Continuous AF] in

the [Motion Picture] menu.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Continuous AF]

Focus setting [Continuous AF] Setting

[AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]

(→91)

[ON] Allow the focus to be constantly adjusted

automatically while recording motion pictures.

[OFF] Fix focus position at the start of motion picture

recording.

[MF] (→104) [ON] / [OFF] Allow the focus to be adjusted manually.

●When the focus setting is set to [AFS], [AFF], or [AFC], the camera will refocus if the shutter

button is pressed halfway while recording motion pictures.

●When Auto Focus is activated while you are recording motion pictures, the focusing operation

sound may be recorded under some conditions. If you want to suppress this sound, we

recommend taking pictures after setting [Continuous AF] to [OFF].

●When using zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take some time to focus.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• While [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is in operation.

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

154 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Pan or zoom while recording with the camera in a

fixed position [4K Live Cropping]

Recording mode:

By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition,

you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a

fixed position.

• Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.

• A motion picture will be recorded at [FHD/20M/30p] under [MP4].

Pan Zoom in

• When you want to zoom in/out, set different angles of view for the cropping start and

end frames. For example, to zoom in, set a larger angle of view for the start frame and

a smaller angle of view for the end frame.

1Set mode dial to [ ]

2Set the menu (→45)

→ [Motion Picture] → [4K Live Cropping]

Settings: [40SEC] / [20SEC] / [OFF]

155 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Pan or zoom while recording with the camera in a fixed position [4K Live Cropping]

3Set the crop start frame and press

[MENU/SET] to set

Crop start frame

• When making settings for the first time, a crop start

frame of size 1920×1080 is displayed. (After setting

the crop start frame and end frame, the start frame

and end frame that you set immediately before will be

displayed.)

• The camera will remember the frame position and size

even when the camera is turned off.

SetSet

SizeSize

ResetReset

StartStart

Operation Touch operation Description

Touch Moves the frame

Pinch out /

Pinch in

Enlarges/reduces the frame

(The range of settings allowed is from 1920×1080 to

3840×2160.)

[DISP.] [Reset] Returns the position of the frame to the center and its

size to the default setting.

[MENU/SET] [Set] Decides the position and size of the frame

4Repeat step 3, and then set the crop end

frame

Crop end frame

• The setting of [AF Mode] switches to [ ] (Face

Detection). (The Eye Detection cannot be used.)

ResetReset

EndEnd

SetSet

SizeSize

5Press the motion picture button (or

shutter button) to start recording

Elapsed recording time

Set operating time

• Immediately release the motion picture button (or

shutter button) after pressing it.

• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording

automatically ends. To end recording midway, press

the motion picture button (or the shutter button) again.

156 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Pan or zoom while recording with the camera in a fixed position [4K Live Cropping]

■Changing the position and size of a crop frame

Press [Fn1] button while the recording screen is displayed, and perform steps 3 and 4.

■To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording

Set [OFF] in step 2.

●The angle of view narrows.

●[4K Live Cropping] recording cannot be performed when [High Speed Video] is set.

●Focus is adjusted and fixed in the crop start frame.

●[Continuous AF] is set to [OFF].

●[Metering Mode] will be [ ] (Multi Metering).

157 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being

recorded

Recording mode:

1Press the shutter button fully during the

motion picture recording

• Up to 30 pictures can be recorded.

• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while

recording still pictures.

• Recording with the Touch Shutter function (→43) is

also available.

●The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].

●Takes a still picture using [Picture Size] [S] (2M). The picture quality may be different to [S] (2M) of

standard pictures.

●Only pictures in JPEG file format are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ], or [ ].

([Quality] is used with the [ ] setting when [ ] is set.)

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/30p]

• When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

158 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

Recording mode:

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like

you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording

and add fade in/out effects in advance.

• Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/30p] in [MP4].

• Using the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”, you can combine motion

pictures recorded with the camera. Music can be added and various editing operations

can be performed when you combine them. In addition, you can send the combined

motion picture to a web service. (→237)

→ [Motion Picture] → [Snap Movie] → [ON]

• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.

1Press the motion picture button to start

recording

Elapsed recording time

Set recording time

• Immediately release the motion picture button after

pressing it.

• You cannot stop motion picture recording in the

middle. The recording will stop automatically when the

set recording time has elapsed.

■Deactivating Snap Movie

Set [Snap Movie] to [OFF].

159 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

■Changing the settings

→ [Motion Picture] → [Snap Movie] → [SET]

[Record time] Sets the recording time of motion pictures.

[Pull Focus] Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually at the start of

recording. (→160)

[Fade] Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio as recording

starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance) effect to them as recording

ends.

[WHITE-IN] / [WHITE-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.

[BLACK-IN] / [BLACK-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.

[COLOR-IN] / [COLOR-OUT]:

Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to color or an effect that fades

out from color to black-and-white. Audio will be recorded normally.

[OFF]

●Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or all-black

thumbnails in Playback Mode.

●If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] in [Custom] menu (→48), you can display a screen

that lets you switch [Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button.

If you press [DISP.] button while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap

Movie.

●[Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote Shooting & View].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• When [4K PHOTO] is set

• When [Post Focus] is set

• When [4K Live Cropping] is set

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

160 DVQP1285

Recording motion pictures

Recording Snap Movies

Setting up [Pull Focus]

Set the frames that specify the positions where the [Pull

Focus] starts (first position) and stops (second position).

Touch operation

Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second position),

and release the finger.

• To cancel the frame settings, touch [ ].

Button operation

Assign [AF Mode] to a function button ([Fn1] - [Fn4]) (→48)

Press the function button that [AF Mode] has assigned to at step

Press to move the frame, and press [MENU/SET] (First position)

• If you press [DISP.] button before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the center.

Repeat step (Second position)

• To cancel the frame settings, press [MENU/SET].

●A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus between the start

and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the background to foreground, or vice

versa.

●After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the camera constant.

●When the camera fails to set the frame, it returns to the first position.

●When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]

• Auto Focus Mode will be switched to [ ], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].

• If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [ ] will take place at the first frame position.

●Even when [Metering Mode] (→174) is set to [ ] (Spot), the spot metering target does not move

with focus. The target is fixed at the start position (first position) of [Pull Focus].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Manual Focus

• When using the Digital Zoom

161 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing your pictures

1Press [ ] (Playback) button

2Press to select a picture to be

displayed

• When you press and hold , the pictures are

displayed one after another.

• Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating

the control dial or dragging the screen horizontally

(→42).

• If you keep your finger touching the left or right edge of

the screen after scrolling the pictures, the pictures will

continue to be scrolled. (The pictures are displayed in

a reduced size.)

Sending pictures to the WEB services

If you press while a single picture is being displayed, you can send the picture to the WEB service

quickly. (→249)

■Ending Playback

Press [ ] (Playback) button again or press the motion picture button.

The Playback can also be ended by pressing the shutter button halfway.

●By holding down [ ] (Playback) button while the camera is off, you can turn the camera on in

playback mode.

●When [Lens Retraction] is set to [ON], the lens barrel is retracted after approx. 15 seconds as the

camera is switched to the playback screen from the recording screen.

●This camera is compliant with the unified DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard

formulated by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA),

and with Exif (Exchangeable image file format). Files that are not DCF-compliant cannot be played

back.

●It may not be possible to properly play back pictures taken using other cameras on this unit or it

may not be possible to use the functions of this unit for those pictures.

162 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing motion pictures

This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.

• Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon ([ ]).

1Press to start playback

Motion picture recording time

• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you

to play back motion pictures.

• Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played

back automatically.

• Some information will not be displayed for motion

pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

■Operations during motion picture playback

Operation Touch operation Description

Play / pause

Fast rewind*1

Single-frame rewind*2 (while paused)

Fast forward*1

Single-frame forward (while paused)

Stop

/ Volume down / Volume up

*1 The fast forward or rewind speed increases if you press again.

*2 Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] are rewound frame by frame approximately every

0.5 seconds.

■Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback

Playback from the beginning

Returning to the previous picture

Scrolling to the next picture

• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.

●Motion pictures can be viewed on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→268).

163 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Viewing motion pictures

Capturing still pictures from motion pictures

Save a scene from a motion picture as a still picture.

1Display the picture that you want to capture as a still

picture by pressing to pause a motion picture being

played back on the camera

• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments

to the positions in a motion picture.

2Press [MENU/SET]

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

• The still picture is saved with aspect ratio of [16:9] and [Quality]

of [ ]. The picture size varies depending on the motion picture

being played back.

[Rec Quality] [Picture Size]

[4K] [M] (8M)

[FHD], [HD] [S] (2M)

●The picture quality becomes slightly lower depending on the [Rec Quality] setting of the original

motion picture.

●When a still picture captured from a motion picture is played back, [ ] is displayed.

●If you want to capture a still picture from a motion picture while the camera is connected to a TV

with the HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] of [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

164 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Switching the Playback Method

Zooming in and viewing “Playback Zoom”

1Move the zoom lever toward T side

Current zoom position

• Each time you move the zoom lever toward the T side, the

magnification increases through four levels: 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, and

16x.

• To reduce zoom → Move the zoom lever toward W side.

• You can also enlarge/reduce the image by pinching out/pinching

in (→42) on the part you want to enlarge/reduce.

• You can move the enlarged part by pressing of the

cursor button or dragging the screen. (→42)

• You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice.

(If the display was enlarged, it returns to the same magnification

ratio.)

• You can forward or rewind a picture while maintaining the same

zoom magnification and zoom position by rotating the control dial

during Playback Zoom.

Viewing a list of pictures “Multi Playback”

1Move the zoom lever toward W side

• Move the zoom lever toward the W side and you can switch the

display methods in the following order: 1-picture screen (full-

screen) → 12-picture screen → 30-picture screen → Calendar

screen. (Move the lever to the T side to return.)

• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the

following icons.

– [ ]: 1-picture screen – [ ]: 12-picture screen

– [ ]: 30-picture screen – [ ]: Calendar screen (→165)

• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up

or down.

• When you select a picture using the cursor button and press

[MENU/SET] on the 12-picture or 30-picture screen, the selected

picture is displayed on the 1-picture screen (full-screen).

●Pictures displayed with [!] cannot be played back.

165 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Switching the Playback Method

Viewing pictures by their recording date “Calendar Playback”

1Move the zoom lever toward the W side to display the

calendar screen

2Use to select recording date and press

[MENU/SET]

Selected date

• Pictures are displayed in a 12-picture screen.

• Turn the zoom lever toward the W side to return to the Calendar

screen display.

MONSUN TUEWEDTHU FRI S AT

●You can display the calendar between January 2000 to December 2099.

●Pictures taken without clock settings are displayed with the date January 1st, 2017.

●Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed in the calendar screen

using the appropriate date for the destination’s time zone.

166 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

You can consecutively play back multiple pictures in a group or play back group pictures

one by one.

[ ]: Group picture saved using [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

(→212)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Time Lapse Shot]

(→135)

[ ]: Group pictures recorded using [Stop Motion

Animation] (→137)

15 pic.15 pic.

• You can delete or edit pictures in group units. (For example, if you delete one of

pictures in a group, all pictures in that group will be deleted.)

●Pictures will not be grouped if they are recorded without setting [Clock Set].

Playing back group pictures consecutively

1Press

•

The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ], [ ]).

• When you play back group pictures one by one, the option settings are displayed.

After you select [Burst Play] (or [Sequential Play]), select one of the following playback methods.

[From the first picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the first picture in a

group.

[From the current picture]: Play back the group pictures consecutively from the picture currently

played back.

■Operations during continuous playback

Continuous playback / Pause Stop

Fast rewind playback Fast forward playback

Returning to the previous picture

(while paused)

Scrolling to the next picture

(while paused)

Playing back group pictures one by one

1Press

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ] / [ ] /

[ ]. 15 pic.15 pic.

2Use to scroll through the pictures

• Pressing again or touching [ ] will return you to the normal

playback screen.

• You can use the same operations for pictures stored in a group

as in normal still picture playback. (Multi Playback, Playback

Zoom, deletion of pictures, etc.)

Viewing group pictures

167 DVQP1285

Playing Back and Editing Pictures

Deleting pictures

Deleted pictures cannot be recovered.

[Delete Single]

1Press [ ] button to delete displayed picture

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2Use to select [Delete Single] and press [MENU/SET]

To delete multiple (up to 100*)/To delete all pictures

* A picture group (→166) is handled as 1 picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture

group are deleted.)

1Press [ ] button while viewing a picture

2Use to select [Delete Multi]/[Delete All] and press [MENU/SET]

Picture selected

• You can select [All Delete Except Favorite] in [Delete All] if there are pictures that have been set

as [Favorite] (→220).

(When [Delete Multi] is selected)

3Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

4Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

• May take time depending on number of pictures deleted.

168 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Rec] →168 [Custom] →186 [Playback] →204

[Motion Picture] →184 [Setup] →196

[Rec]

• The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Sensitivity], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering

Mode], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction Compensation], [i.Zoom], [Digital Zoom]

and [Stabilizer] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If a

setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will also

be changed automatically.

• [Photo Style] (→169)

• [Filter Settings] (→171)

• [Aspect Ratio] (→172)

• [Picture Size] (→173)

• [Quality] (→173)

• [Sensitivity] (→108)

• [White Balance] (→110)

• [AF Mode] (→92)

• [AFS/AFF/AFC] (→91)

• [Metering Mode] (→174)

• [Burst Rate] (→130)

• [4K PHOTO] (→114)

• [Bracket] (→133)

• [Self Timer] (→132)

• [i.Dynamic] (→175)

• [i.Resolution] (→175)

• [iHandheld Night Shot] (→55)

• [iHDR] (→56)

• [HDR] (→176)

• [Time Lapse Shot] (→135)

• [Stop Motion Animation] (→137)

• [Panorama Settings] (→63, 73)

• [Shutter Type] (→177)

• [Flash Adjust.] (→148)

• [Red-Eye Removal] (→178)

• [ISO Limit Set] (→178)

• [ISO Increments] (→178)

• [Extended ISO] (→179)

• [Diffraction Compensation] (→179)

• [i.Zoom] (→143)

• [Digital Zoom] (→144)

• [Stabilizer] (→140)

• [Face Recog.] (→180)

• [Profile Setup] (→183)

169 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Photo Style]

Recording mode:

You can adjust the colors and picture quality according to the concept of the picture that

you want to create.

→ [Rec] → [Photo Style]

[Standard] Standard setting.

[Vivid]*Setting with slightly high contrast and saturation.

[Natural]*Setting with slightly low contrast.

[Monochrome] Setting that creates a picture using monochrome shades of gray only,

such as black and white.

[Scenery]*Setting that creates a picture using vivid colors for the blue sky and

green.

[Portrait]*Setting that produces the look of a healthy complexion.

[Custom]*Setting for using colors and picture quality that were registered in

advance.

* This setting is not available in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

●In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched

to another Recording mode or this unit is turned on and off.

●Only picture quality adjustment can be set in the Scene Guide Mode. (→170)

170 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

■Adjusting the picture quality

• Picture quality cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto

Plus Mode.

Standard

Press to select the type of Photo Style

Press to select an item and press to adjust

[Contrast] [+] Increases the contrast in a picture.

[–] Decreases the contrast in a picture.

[Sharpness] [+] Enhances the outlines in a picture.

[–] Softens the outlines in a picture.

[Noise Reduction]

[+] Increases the noise reduction effect to reduce noise. This

setting may slightly lower the resolution.

[–] Lowers the noise reduction effect to achieve a picture

quality with clearer resolution.

[Saturation]*1[+] Gaudy coloring

[–] Subdued coloring

[Color Tone]*1[+] Bluish coloring

[–] Yellowish coloring

[Filter Effect]*2

[Yellow] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Low)

Records a blue sky clearly.

[Orange] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: Medium)

Records a blue sky with vibrant colors.

[Red] Enhances the contrast of a subject. (Effect: High)

Records a blue sky with even more vibrant colors.

[Green] Applies subdued coloring for the skin and lips of a person.

Emphasizes green leaves and makes them brighter.

[Off] —

*1 [Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. Otherwise, [Saturation] is

displayed.

*2 Displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected.

• When the picture quality is adjusted, [+] will be displayed in the [Photo Style] icon.

Press [MENU/SET]

■Registering the setting for the adjusted picture quality to [Custom]

Perform the picture quality adjustment in Step of “Adjusting the picture quality” and

press the [DISP.] button

171 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Filter Settings]

Recording mode:

You can apply picture effects (filters) that are available for Creative Control Mode to

images in other modes, such as Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Panorama Shot Mode.

(→79)

→ [Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Filter Effect]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]

■With touch screen operations

Touch [ ]

EXPSEXPS

Touch the item you want to set

[ ]: Picture effects ON or OFF

[ ]: Picture effects (Filter)

[ ]: Adjusting the picture effect

●Cannot be used during [High Speed Video] recording.

●[Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] and [Sunshine] are not

available in the following cases.

• Creative Video Mode ([Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] and [Miniature Effect] also cannot be used when

[4K Live Cropping] is set.)

• During motion picture recording

●The following functions are not available in Panorama Shot Mode.

– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect], [Sunshine]

●When recording panorama pictures, the following effects are not applied to the recording screen.

– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter]

●When recording a panorama picture in a scene with low brightness, you may not be able to

achieve the desired results if [High Key] is used in the Panorama Shot Mode.

●The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [3200]. The ISO sensitivity for

[High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].

●When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions which are not available in

Creative Control Mode.

172 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

■Taking two still pictures with and without picture effects

([Simultaneous record w/o filter])

You can take two still pictures at the same time by pressing the shutter button once; one

with effects and one without effects.

→ [Rec] → [Filter Settings] → [Simultaneous record w/o filter]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

• The camera will take a still picture with the effects applied and then a still picture

without the effects.

• After taking the picture, [Auto Review] will display only the still picture with the effects

applied.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• Taking still pictures while a motion picture is being recorded

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When recording using [Bracket]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When using [Stop Motion Animation]

[Aspect Ratio]

Recording mode:

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback

method.

→ [Rec] → [Aspect Ratio]

[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 TV

[3:2] Aspect ratio of standard film cameras

[16:9] Aspect ratio of high-definition TV, etc.

[1:1] Aspect ratio of a square image

173 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Picture Size]

Recording mode:

The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even

when they are printed onto large sheets.

→ [Rec] → [Picture Size]

[Aspect Ratio] 4:3 3:2 16:9 1:1

[Picture Size]

[L] 20M

5184×3888

[L] 17M

5184×3456

[L] 14.5M

5184×2920

[L] 14.5M

3888×3888

[ M] 10M

3712×2784

[ M] 9M

3712×2480

[ M] 8M

3840×2160

[ M] 7.5M

2784×2784

[ S] 5M

2624×1968

[ S] 4.5M

2624×1752

[ S] 2M

1920×1080

[ S] 3.5M

1968×1968

●The picture size will be fixed to [4K] when recording 4K photos or recording in [Post Focus].

[Quality]

Recording mode:

Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.

→ [Rec] → [Quality]

Settings File format Description

[ ]

JPEG

Gives priority to picture quality and saves pictures in JPEG file

format.

[ ]

Saves pictures in JPEG file format using standard picture quality.

This setting is useful when you want to increase the number of

recordable pictures without changing the number of pixels.

[ ] RAW + JPEG Saves pictures in both RAW and JPEG file format ([ ] or [ ])

simultaneously.

[ ]

[ ] RAW Saves pictures in RAW file format.

174 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

About RAW file

In RAW file format the data is saved without any picture processing by the camera. To play back and

edit RAW file pictures, you must use this unit or dedicated software.

• You can develop the RAW file pictures using [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu. (→210)

• To develop and edit RAW file pictures on a PC, use the software (Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s

“SILKYPIX Developer Studio”). To get this software, download it from the supplier’s website and

install it on your PC. (→269)

●A RAW still picture is always recorded at [4:3] (5184×3888).

●If you delete a picture recorded in [ ] or [ ] from the camera, the corresponding RAW and

JPEG pictures are also deleted.

●When you play back a picture recorded with [ ], the gray area is displayed according to the

aspect ratio of the picture during recording.

●The setting is fixed to [ ] when recording 4K photos or recording in [Post Focus].

●You cannot set to [ ], [ ] or [ ] in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

[Metering Mode]

Recording mode:

You can change the metering method used for measuring brightness.

→ [Rec] → [Metering Mode]

[Metering Mode] Brightness measurement position Conditions

(Multiple) Whole screen Normal usage

(produces balanced pictures)

(Center weighted) Center and surrounding area Subject in center

(Spot)

Center of [+] (spot metering target)

Great difference between

brightness of subject and

background

(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,

backlighting)

●If you set the spot metering target on the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the

brightness around the location.

175 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[i.Dynamic]

Recording mode:

Automatically adjusts contrast and exposure to give more lifelike colors when there is

significant contrast between background and subject.

→ [Rec] → [i.Dynamic]

Settings: [AUTO] / [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [OFF]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• When [Sensitivity] is set to [H.6400]

[i.Resolution]

Recording mode:

You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution technology to record still pictures with

sharper outlines and clearer resolution.

→ [Rec] → [i.Resolution]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [LOW] / [EXTENDED] / [OFF]

●When [EXTENDED] is set, you can take more natural pictures with the impression of high-

resolution.

●The [EXTENDED] setting will automatically change to the [LOW] setting while recording motion

pictures, recording 4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].

176 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[HDR]

Recording mode:

The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at different exposures into a single

properly exposed picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures used to create the

HDR picture are not saved. You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and

dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is

large.

A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.

→ [Rec] → [HDR]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during the burst operation.

●Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be a few

moments before you will be able to record another picture.

●A subject that was in motion when it was recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.

●When you take pictures using a flash, the flash mode is fixed to [ ] (Forced Flash Off).

●This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• In Self Shot Mode

• When using [Burst]

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When recording using [Bracket]

• When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

177 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Shutter Type]

Recording mode:

You can take pictures using two types of shutter modes: the mechanical shutter and

electronic shutter.

Mechanical shutter Electronic shutter

Flash ○–

Shutter Speed

(seconds) 4*1, *2 - 1/2000 1*1 - 1/16000

Shutter sound

Mechanical shutter sound

Electronic shutter sound*3

*1 Varies depending on the setting of ISO sensitivity. (→108)

*2 The shutter speed is set to 30 seconds in [Artistic Nightscape] (Scene Guide Mode).

*3 You can use [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone] to adjust the volume of the electronic shutter sound.

(→198)

→ [Rec] → [Shutter Type]

[AUTO]

The shutter mode automatically switches based on the recording conditions and

shutter speed.

• The mechanical shutter mode has higher priority over the electronic shutter

mode because the mechanical shutter has less function-related restrictions

when recording with a flash, etc.

[MSHTR] Uses only the mechanical shutter mode to take a picture.

[ESHTR] Uses only the electronic shutter mode to take a picture.

●When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording is performed with an electronic shutter.

●If you take a picture of a moving subject using the electronic shutter, the subject in the

picture may be skewed in some cases.

●When you take a picture under a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture using the electronic

shutter, the recorded picture may have horizontal stripes. If you use a slower shutter

speed, the horizontal stripes may be reduced. (→68)

178 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Red-Eye Removal]

Recording mode:

Automatically detects red-eye and corrects still picture data when recording with flash

red-eye reduction ([ ], [ ] or [ ]).

→ [Rec] → [Red-Eye Removal]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When this function is set to [ON], the flash icon changes to [ ]/[ ]/[ ].

●Depending on the circumstance, it may not be possible to correct red-eye.

[ISO Limit Set]

Recording mode:

You can set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or

[ ].

→ [Rec] → [ISO Limit Set]

Settings: [200] / [400] / [800] / [1600] / [3200] / [OFF]

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• During motion picture recording

[ISO Increments]

Recording mode:

You can change the setting to increase ISO sensitivity by 1 EV or 1/3 EV.

→ [Rec] → [ISO Increments]

Settings: [1/3EV] / [1 EV]

179 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Extended ISO]

Recording mode:

You can extend the numeric values that can be set for ISO Sensitivity.

→ [Rec] → [Extended ISO]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●The setting cannot be made during 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].

[Diffraction Compensation]

Recording mode:

The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when

the aperture is closed.

→ [Rec] → [Diffraction Compensation]

Settings: [AUTO] / [OFF]

●Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

180 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Face Recog.]

Recording mode:

The Face Recognition function recognizes a face similar to a registered face and

automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the face with higher priority. Even if a person

you want to focus on is standing at the back or corner in a group photo, the camera will

automatically recognize the person and record this person’s face clearly.

→ [Rec] → [Face Recog.]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF] / [MEMORY]

■How the Face Recognition function works

During recording

• The camera recognizes a registered face and adjusts focus

and exposure.

• When registered faces that have set names are recognized,

the names are displayed (max. 3 people).

During playback

• The name and age are displayed.

●[Face Recog.] functions only when Auto Focus mode is set to [ ].

●Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain Face Recognition information.

●The name of the person recognized in the first picture is displayed in the case of group pictures.

●You can rename the person in these pictures in [REPLACE] in [Face Rec Edit] (→222).

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• [Slimming Mode] (In Self Shot Mode)

• During motion picture recording

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

181 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

■Registering face pictures

Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with such information as name and

birthdate.

Use to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]

654

KEN

New

Use to select [New] and press [MENU/SET]

Align the face with the guide and record

• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets) cannot be

registered.

• When is pressed or [ ] is touched, an explanation is

displayed.

Use to select the item for editing and press [MENU/SET]

[Name] Set the name.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

[Age] Set the birthdate.

[Add Images] Use to select [Add] and press [MENU/SET]

• When a registered face picture is selected with cursor button, a screen to

confirm deletion is displayed. Select [Yes] to delete the face picture.

Record the picture (step )

182 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

Recording tips when registering face pictures

• Make sure the subject’s eyes are open and mouth closed;

have the subject face the camera directly, and make sure

the outline of the face, the eyes and eyebrows are not

hidden by hair.

• Make sure there are no heavy shadows on the face. (During

registration, the flash is not used.)

Good example for registering

a face

If the camera seems to have difficulty recognizing faces when recording

• Register additional pictures of the same person’s face, indoors and outdoors or with

different expressions or angles.

• Register additional pictures at the place you are recording.

• If a registered person is no longer recognized, re-register that person.

• In some cases, the camera cannot recognize or incorrectly recognizes even registered

people depending on their expression or the environment.

■Editing or deleting information about registered persons

Use to select [MEMORY] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select the picture of the person to be edited or deleted and press

[MENU/SET]

Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Info Edit] Edit name or other registered information. (Step of “Registering face pictures”)

[Priority] Set priority order for focus and exposure.

Use to select the registration order and press [MENU/SET]

[Delete] Delete information and face pictures of registered persons.

183 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Profile Setup]

Recording mode:

You can set a name or birthday of a baby or pet before taking a picture to record the

name or age in months/years in the picture.

■Setting the name and age in months/years

→ [Rec] → [Profile Setup]

Settings: [ ] ([Baby1]) / [ ] ([Baby2]) / [ ] ([Pet]) / [OFF] / [SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [Age] or [Name] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select [SET] and press [MENU/SET]

Enter the [Age].

Enter the [Name].

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

Use to select [Exit] and press [MENU/SET] to finish

■Canceling the display of the name and age in months/years

Set [Profile Setup] to [OFF].

●[Name] and [Age] print settings can be made on your computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

software (→268), which you download from a website. Text may also be stamped onto the still

picture using the camera’s [Text Stamp].

●[Profile Setup] is not available for 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].

●You cannot record the name or age in months/years in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• Still pictures that are taken while recording motion pictures (→157)

184 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Motion Picture]

• The [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Sensitivity], [AF Mode], [AFS/AFF/AFC], [Metering

Mode], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution], [Diffraction Compensation], [i.Zoom], [Digital Zoom]

and [Stabilizer] menu items are common for both [Rec] and [Motion Picture] menus. If

a setting in one menu is changed, the setting with the same name in other menu will

also be changed automatically. For details, refer to the corresponding item of the [Rec]

menu.

• [4K Live Cropping] (→154)

• [Snap Movie] (→158)

• [Rec Format] (→151)

• [Rec Quality] (→151)

• [Exposure Mode] (→85)

• [High Speed Video] (→86)

• [Continuous AF] (→153)

• [Level Shot] (→184)

• [Flkr Decrease] (→185)

• [Silent Operation] (→87)

• [Wind Noise Canceller] (→185)

• [Zoom Mic] (→185)

[Level Shot]

Recording mode:

Level Shot function automatically detects the camera’s tilt while recording motion pictures,

and horizontally corrects the recording motion picture so it will not be tilted.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Level Shot]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●If you record while walking, or if the camera’s tilt is large, it may not be possible to horizontally

correct the motion pictures.

●When [Level Shot] is set to [ON]

• The angle of view becomes slightly narrow when motion picture recording starts.

●Still pictures taken while recording motion pictures will not be horizontally corrected.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• When recording with [High Speed Video]

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

• When [Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]

• When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4], and [Rec Quality] is set to [4K/100M/30p]

185 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Flkr Decrease]

Recording mode:

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Flkr Decrease]

Settings: [1/50] / [1/60] / [1/100] / [1/120] / [OFF]

[Wind Noise Canceller]

Recording mode:

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining

sound quality.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Wind Noise Canceller]

Settings: [HIGH] / [STANDARD] / [OFF]

• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimizing the low-pitched sound when a

strong wind is detected.

• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound

quality.

●You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

[Zoom Mic]

Recording mode:

Coupled to the zoom operation, it will more clearly record far sounds during enlarging

image, and surrounding sounds with wide-angle.

→ [Motion Picture] → [Zoom Mic]

Settings: [ON] / [OFF]

●When set to [ON] and performing zoom, the operation sound may be recorded enhanced in

accordance with the surrounding sounds. Also, audio recording level will be lower compared to

when [OFF].

●The stereo effect of the audio is reduced during enlarging image.

186 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

• [Cust.Set Mem.] (→88)

• [Silent Mode] (→186)

• [AF/AE Lock] (→106)

• [AF/AE Lock Hold] (→187)

• [Shutter AF] (→187)

• [Half Press Release] (→187)

• [Quick AF] (→187)

• [Eye Sensor AF] (→187)

• [Pinpoint AF Time] (→187)

• [Pinpoint AF Display] (→188)

• [AF Assist Lamp] (→188)

• [Direct Focus Area] (→188)

• [Focus/Release Priority] (→188)

• [AF+MF] (→189)

• [MF Assist] (→189)

• [MF Assist Display] (→189)

• [MF Guide] (→189)

• [Peaking] (→190)

• [Histogram] (→190)

• [Guide Line] (→191)

• [Center Marker] (→191)

• [Highlight] (→191)

• [Zebra Pattern] (→192)

• [Monochrome Live View] (→192)

• [Expo.Meter] (→193)

• [Dial Guide] (→193)

• [LVF Disp.Style] (→39)

• [Monitor Disp. Style] (→39)

• [Rec Area] (→193)

• [Remaining Disp.] (→193)

• [Auto Review] (→194)

• [Fn Button Set] (→48)

• [Zoom lever] (→194)

• [Lens Position Resume] (→194)

• [Lens Retraction] (→194)

• [Ring/Dial Set] (→51)

• [Eye Sensor] (→35)

• [Self Shot] (→195)

• [Touch Settings] (→195)

• [Touch Scroll] (→195)

• [Menu Guide] (→195)

[Silent Mode]

Disabling the beeps and flash at the same time.

• This mode will mute beeps, set the flash to [ ] (Forced Flash Off), and disable AF

Assist Lamp.

The settings for the following functions are fixed:

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– Flash: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)

– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]

– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (Off)

– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (Off)

●Even when this mode is set to [ON], the following lamps/indicators will light or flash.

• Self-timer indicator

• Wi-Fi connection lamp

●The operation sounds of this camera such as the lens aperture sound are not muted.

→ [Custom]

[Custom]

187 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[AF/AE Lock Hold]

Focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release the function button where

[AF/AE LOCK] is registered. Press the button again to cancel the lock.

[Shutter AF]

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

[Half Press Release]

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

[Quick AF]

The focus is automatically adjusted when camera blurring is small even when the shutter

button is not pressed. (Increases battery consumption).

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Preview Mode

• When the lighting is low

[Eye Sensor AF]

Adjusts the focus automatically when the eye sensor is activated.

●[Eye Sensor AF] may not work when the lighting is low.

[Pinpoint AF Time]

Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway

with Auto Focus Mode set to [ ].

→ [Custom]

188 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Pinpoint AF Display]

Sets whether to display the assist screen that appears when Auto Focus Mode is set to

[ ] in a window or full screen.

[AF Assist Lamp]

Illuminates the AF Assist Lamp when the shutter button is pressed halfway when it is too

dark to facilitate focusing.

●The AF Assist Lamp has an effective distance of 1.5 m (4.9 feet).

●The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:

• [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening

Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape],

[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

[Direct Focus Area]

Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button while recording.

●When [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can move the AF area and when [ ] is

selected, you can move the enlarged position.

●Perform the setting of functions assigned to the cursor buttons using the Quick menu (→47) or

function buttons (→48, 49).

●[Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases:

• [Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)

• Creative Control Mode

• When recording using [4K Live Cropping]

[Focus/Release Priority]

Disables recording when a subject is out of focus.

189 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[AF+MF]

You can manually perform fine focusing during AF Lock (pressing the shutter button

halfway when [AFS/AFF/AFC] in [Rec] menu is set to [AFS] or setting AF Lock using the

[AF/AE LOCK]).

[MF Assist]

Sets whether to display the MF Assist (enlarged screen) during Manual Focus.

●MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function

• When using the Digital Zoom

[MF Assist Display]

Sets whether to display the MF Assist (enlarged screen) in a window or full screen.

[MF Guide]

When you focus manually, the MF guide is displayed on the

screen. You can check whether the point of focus is to the

near side or the far side.

Indicator for (infinity)

→ [Custom]

190 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Peaking]

When you perform Manual Focus operation, this function automatically adds color to the

portions of the image that are in Focus (portions on the screen with clear outlines).

●When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you

to achieve a more precise focus.

●Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows.

[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]

[Display Color]

[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)

[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)

[ ] (Yellow Green) [ ] (Green)

[ ] (Pink) [ ] (Red)

[ ] (White) [ ] (Gray)

●Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ ] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW]) → [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].

●This function is not available in the following case:

• [Rough Monochrome] (Creative Control Mode)

[Histogram]

Enabling/disabling the histogram display.

When set to [ON], you can move the display position of the histogram by pressing .

• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.

Displays distribution of brightness in picture – e.g.

if the graph peaks at the right, this means there are

several bright areas in the picture. A peak in the center

represents correct brightness (correct exposure). This

can be used as a reference for exposure correction, etc.

(Example)

Dark ← OK → Bright

●When the histogram is not the same as that of the recorded picture under the following

conditions, histogram will be displayed in orange:

• During Exposure Compensation.

• When the flash fires.

• When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as when the lighting is low.

191 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Guide Line]

Sets the pattern of the guidelines to be displayed while recording.

●When you select [ ], you can move the position of the guideline by pressing .

●You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording screen.

●The guideline is not displayed during panorama picture recording.

[Center Marker]

A cross [+] is displayed to indicate the center of the recording screen. This is useful for

zooming while keeping the subject at the center of the screen.

[Highlight]

You can set overexposed areas (areas that are too bright and where there are no shades

of gray) to flash on the screen when the [Auto Review] function is activated or during

playback. This does not affect recorded pictures.

●To reduce overexposed areas, record a picture by setting negative

exposure compensation (→107) using the histogram display (→190) and

so on as a reference.

●This feature is disabled during 4K photo playback, playback of pictures

recorded in [Post Focus], Multi Playback, Calendar Playback, or

Playback Zoom.

192 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Zebra Pattern]

You can check the area in a picture, which could result in overexposure, by displaying

such an area using a zebra pattern.

[ZEBRA1]: [ZEBRA2]:

Select [SET] to set the brightness to be displayed for each zebra pattern.

• The range of brightness you can select from is [50%] to [105%]. The [OFF] setting is

available for [Zebra 2]. When [100%] or [105%] is selected, only the overexposed areas

are displayed with the zebra pattern. When a smaller numeric value is set, the range of

brightness to be displayed by each zebra pattern will increase.

●To reduce overexposed areas, record a picture by setting negative exposure compensation

(→107) using the histogram display (→190) and so on as a reference.

●The displayed zebra pattern is not recorded.

●If you set [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (→48) in the [Custom] menu, every time you press

the assigned function button the setting will switch in the following order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra 2]

→ [Zebra OFF]. When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], you can switch the setting quickly in the following

order: [Zebra 1] → [Zebra OFF].

[Monochrome Live View]

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is useful when a

black and white screen will make it easier to adjust focus in Manual Focus mode.

●This does not affect recorded pictures.

193 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Expo.Meter]

Enabling/disabling the exposure meter display.

Exposure meter

●When you set this function to [ON], an exposure meter is displayed

during Program Shift, aperture setting, and shutter speed

operation.

●Proper exposure is not possible in the range indicated in red.

●If the exposure meter is not displayed, press the [DISP.] button to

switch the display of the monitor.

●The exposure meter will turn off if no operation is performed for

approximately 4 seconds.

15 30 60 125 250

8.04.0 5.6

[Dial Guide]

Enabling/disabling the operation guide display when switching

recording modes.

Example

[Rec Area]

Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still pictures and motion pictures.

●The recording area indicated is an approximation.

●[Rec Area] is not available for 4K photo recording or recording in [Post Focus].

[Remaining Disp.]

Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures that you can take and

the available recording time.

→ [Custom]

194 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Auto Review]

Set the time to display the pictures you have taken after taking still pictures.

●When [HOLD] is selected, pictures are displayed until you press the shutter button halfway.

●During 4K Photo recording and [Post Focus] recording, the [Auto Review] settings items change to

[ON] and [OFF].

[Zoom lever]

Changing the zoom operation settings.

(Zoom) The zoom operates in the normal way.

(Step Zoom)

Each time zoom is operated, the zoom stops at the position for one of the

preset focal lengths.

Focus range

Current zoom position

• This setting does not work when

recording motion pictures or 4K photos

with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]).

[Lens Position Resume]

Remember the zoom position and focus position when the camera is turned off.

[Lens Retraction]

Retract the lens barrel automatically after approx. 15 seconds as the camera is switched

to the playback screen from the recording screen.

195 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

→ [Custom]

[Self Shot]

If this is set to [OFF], the camera will not switch to Self Shot Mode (→58) even if you

rotate the monitor.

[Touch Settings]

Enabling/disabling the touch operation.

[Touch Screen] All touch operations.

[Touch Tab] Operations of tabs, such as [ ] displayed on the right side of the screen.

[Touch AF]Operation to optimize the focus [AF] or both the focus and brightness

[AF+AE] for a touched subject.

[Touch Pad AF]Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the

viewfinder is in use. (→101)

[Touch Scroll]

This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding or rewinding pictures using

touch operation.

[Menu Guide]

Displaying/not displaying the selection screen when the mode dial is switched to

[ ]/[ ].

196 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

• [Online Manual] (→196)

• [Clock Set] (→30)

• [World Time] (→196)

• [Travel Date] (→197)

• [Wi-Fi] (→197)

• [Beep] (→198)

• [Live View Mode] (→198)

• [Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder] (→199)

• [Monitor Luminance] (→199)

• [Economy] (→200)

• [USB Mode] (→200)

• [TV Connection] (→201)

• [m/ft] (→201)

• [Menu Resume] (→201)

• [Menu Background] (→201)

• [Menu Information] (→202)

• [Language] (→202)

• [Version Disp.] (→202)

• [Exposure Comp. Reset] (→202)

• [Self Timer Auto Off] (→202)

• [No.Reset] (→202)

• [Reset] (→203)

• [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] (→203)

• [Level Gauge Adjust.] (→203)

• [Demo Mode] (→203)

• [Format] (→28)

[Online Manual]

Settings: [URL display] / [QR Code display]

[World Time]

Sets the times for the region where you live and your travel destination.

• You can set [Destination] after setting [Home].

Settings: [Destination] / [Home]

1Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select area and press [MENU/SET]

When [Destination] has been selected When [Home] has been selected

Current time at selected destination

City/area name

Difference with home time

→ [Setup]

[Setup]

197 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

■To set daylight savings

Press in step 2. (Press again to release the setting)

• When daylight savings [ ] is set, the current time is advanced by 1 hour. If the setting is

canceled, the time automatically returns to the current time.

■When you come back from your travel destination

Select [Home] in step 1 and press [MENU/SET].

●If you cannot find your destination in the area displayed on the screen, set based on difference

with home time.

[Travel Date]

■[Travel Setup]

If you set your travel schedule and record pictures, the day of your trip on which the

picture was taken will be recorded.

■To record [Location]

Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the location.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

●To print [Location] or the number of days that have passed, either use [Text Stamp] (→216) or

print using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268).

●The travel date is calculated from the set departure date and the date set in the camera’s clock.

When destination is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based on local destination

time.

●When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not

displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.

●When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically canceled.

●[Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures.

●[Location] cannot be recorded while recording motion pictures, recording 4K photos, or recording

in [Post Focus].

[Wi-Fi]

■[Wi-Fi Function] (→255)

■[Wi-Fi Setup] (→261)

→ [Setup]

198 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Beep]

Sets the beep sounds or shutter sounds.

■[Beep Volume]

■[Shutter Vol.]

■[Shutter Tone]

●When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep] is not available.

[Live View Mode]

Sets the display speed and picture quality of the screen (Live View screen) when

recording pictures.

[ECO 30fps] The onscreen display is set to 30 fps, with a greater reduction in power

consumption than in [30fps].

[30fps] Power conservation is prioritized and the onscreen display is set to 30 fps.

[60fps]

Display speed has higher priority over picture quality and pictures are displayed

at 60 fps.

For example, use when you want to record a fast-moving subject.

●When [Live View Mode] is set to [ECO 30fps], Digital Zoom is not available.

●Cannot set to [ECO 30fps] in the following cases:

• Creative Video Mode

• When recording 4K photos

• When recording using [Post Focus]

●The [Live View Mode] setting does not affect the recorded picture.

●The viewfinder is fixed to [60fps].

→ [Setup]

199 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Monitor Display] / [Viewfinder]

Adjust brightness and color of the monitor or viewfinder.

[Brightness] Adjusts the brightness.

[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.

[Saturation] Adjusts the vividness of colors.

[Red Tint] Adjusts red hues.

[Blue Tint] Adjusts blue hues.

●It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in

use.

●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not

be affected.

[Monitor Luminance]

Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level.

(Auto) The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is

around the camera.

(Mode 1) The brightness is increased.

(Mode 2) The brightness is standard.

(Mode 3) The brightness is decreased.

●Some subjects may look different from their actual appearance, but the recorded picture will not

be affected.

●[ ] returns to ordinary brightness if there is no operation for 30 seconds when recording. (Press

any button or touch the screen to make the screen brighter again.)

●Setting [ ] or [ ] reduces the operating time.

●Cannot select [ ] during playback.

●When the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional) are used, the initial setting is [ ].

→ [Setup]

200 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Economy]

■[Auto Power Off]

The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time

selected on the setting.

• When you want to use the camera again, turn the camera back on.

■[Auto Power Off(Wi-Fi)]

The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for approx.

15 minutes with no Wi-Fi connection.

• When you want to use the camera again, turn the camera back on.

■[Auto LVF/Monitor Off]

The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the

time selected on the setting.

• To turn the monitor/viewfinder on again, press any button or touch the monitor.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• During motion picture recording/playback

• When recording with [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) of the 4K Photo function

• When connected to computer/printer

• During Slide Shows

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

• When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]

●When using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), [Auto Power Off] or [Auto Power

Off(Wi-Fi)] is disabled. Also, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to [5 MIN.].

[USB Mode]

Select communication method for when connecting camera to a computer or printer with

USB connection cable (supplied).

[Select on connection] Select communication method each time you connect to a

computer or PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PictBridge(PTP)] Select when connecting to a PictBridge-compatible printer.

[PC] Select when connecting to a computer.

→ [Setup]

201 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[TV Connection]

■[HDMI Mode (Play)]

Set the format for the output.

[AUTO] Automatically sets the output resolution based on information from a connected TV.

[4K] Outputs pictures with a output resolution of 3840×2160 pixels using a progressive scan

method for the number of effective scanning lines (2,160 lines).

[1080p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning

lines (1,080 lines).

[1080i] Outputs pictures using an interlace scan method for the number of effective scanning

lines (1,080 lines).

[720p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning

lines (720 lines).

[480p] Outputs pictures using a progressive scan method for the number of effective scanning

lines (480 lines).

●If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a constant setting other than

[AUTO] to set a format supported by your TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

■[VIERA Link]

If you select [ON], operations of the camera and the VIERA Link compatible equipment

connected to the camera with an HDMI micro cable are automatically linked, enabling you

to control the camera with the remote control of the VIERA Link compatible equipment.

(→266)

[m/ft]

Select how distance is displayed, in Ft or M.

[Menu Resume]

Save the last operated menu position.

[Menu Background]

Set the background color for the menu screen.

→ [Setup]

202 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Menu Information]

Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen.

[Language]

Set the language displayed on the screen.

●If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set the desired

language.

[Version Disp.]

Check the firmware version of the camera.

●When you press [MENU/SET] while the version is displayed, software information for this unit,

such as the license, is displayed.

[Exposure Comp. Reset]

If the recording mode is changed or the camera is turned off, the exposure compensation

setting is reset.

[Self Timer Auto Off]

The self-timer is canceled if the unit is turned off.

[No.Reset]

Reset picture file numbers. (The folder number is updated and the file number starts from

0001.)

• To reset folder number to 100:

First, format the card, and reset the file numbers using [No.Reset]. Then, select [Yes]

on the folder number reset screen.

●A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.

Numbers cannot be reset once folder number reaches 999. In this case, save all necessary

pictures to your computer, and format the card (→28).

→ [Setup]

203 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Reset]

The following settings are reset to the default:

■Recording settings (except for [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings) and

drive mode

■Recording settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)

■Setup/custom settings

●When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset:

• The [World Time] setting

• The [Travel Date] setting (Departure date, Return date, [Location])

• The settings of [Rotate Disp.] and [Picture Sort] in the [Playback] menu

●Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

Returns [Wi-Fi] settings to default settings.

(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Level Gauge Adjust.]

■[Adjust.]

Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET]. The level gauge will be

adjusted.

■[Level Gauge Value Reset]

Restores the default level gauge setting.

[Demo Mode]

You can try focusing, peaking, etc. in [Post Focus] (→124), with the image picture.

→ [Setup]

204 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Playback]

• [Slide Show] (→205)

• [Playback Mode] (→206)

• [Location Logging] (→207)

• [Beauty Retouch] (→208)

• [RAW Processing] (→210)

• [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (→212)

• [Light Composition] (→213)

• [Clear Retouch] (→214)

• [Title Edit] (→215)

• [Text Stamp] (→216)

• [Video Divide] (→217)

• [Time Lapse Video] (→217)

• [Stop Motion Video] (→218)

• [Resize] (→218)

• [Cropping] (→219)

• [Rotate] (→219)

• [Rotate Disp.] (→220)

• [Favorite] (→220)

• [Print Set] (→221)

• [Protect] (→222)

• [Face Rec Edit] (→222)

• [Picture Sort] (→223)

●In the following cases, new pictures are created after they have been edited. Before starting to

edit, make sure that there is enough free space in the memory card.

• [Beauty Retouch] / [RAW Processing] / [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] / [Light Composition] /

[Clear Retouch] / [Text Stamp] / [Time Lapse Video] / [Stop Motion Video] / [Resize] / [Cropping]

●It may not be possible to set or edit pictures taken with other cameras.

■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]

When [Single] and [Multi] are not available, select a picture in the same way as when

[Single] is selected.

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the

setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.

SetSet

[Multi]

When a screen similar to the one on the right is

displayed:

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

When a screen similar to the one on the right is

displayed:

2 3

4 5 6

Set/Cancel

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

205 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Slide Show]

Automatically plays back recorded pictures, one after another. You can organize slide

shows composed of only still pictures or only motion pictures. Recommended when

viewing on TV screen.

→ [Playback] → [Slide Show]

1Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files and pictures recorded

using [Post Focus] will also be played back.

• Only an in-focus representative image will be played back from

pictures recorded using [Post Focus].

2Use to select [Start] and press [MENU/SET]

■Operations during Slide Show

Operation Touch operation Description

Play / Pause

Stop

/ Volume down / Volume up

206 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

■To change settings

Select [Effect] or [Setup] and press [MENU/SET].

[Effect] This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one

picture to the next.

[Setup] [Duration] • [Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to [OFF].

[Repeat] [ON] / [OFF]

[Sound] [AUTO]: With still pictures, music will play back, and with motion

pictures, audio will play back.

[Music]: Music effect will play back.

[Audio]: Audio is played back from motion pictures.

[OFF]: Music and audio will not play back.

●During slide shows of 4K burst files, pictures recorded in [Post Focus], or group pictures, effects

will stay turned off even if [Effect] is set.

●When you play back the following pictures in a slide show, the [Duration] setting is disabled.

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Panorama pictures

• Group pictures

[Playback Mode]

Selects the type of the pictures and play back. ([Normal Play], [Picture Only], [Video

Only])

→ [Playback] → [Playback Mode]

1Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

• If you select [Video Only], 4K burst files and pictures recorded using [Post Focus] will also be

played back.

207 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Location Logging]

After you send location information (latitude and longitude) obtained by your smartphone/

tablet to this unit, you can write this information on pictures using the unit.

Preparation

Send location information to this unit from your smartphone/tablet. (→235)

• You must install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone/tablet. (→228)

→ [Playback] → [Location Logging]

1Use to select [Add Location Data] and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select a period for writing location information, and press

[MENU/SET]

• [ ] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.

■Abort writing location information

Press [MENU/SET] while location information is being written

• [ ] is displayed for the period of the abort operation.

If selected again while [ ] is displayed, writing location information will resume where it left off.

■Delete received location information

Use to select [Delete Location Data] and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a period for deleting location information, and press [MENU/SET]

●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:

• Pictures that were recorded after you sent the location information (→235)

• Pictures that already have location information

• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format

When you use your smartphone/tablet as a remote controller for this unit, you can write the

location information on pictures using the smartphone/tablet. (→236)

208 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Beauty Retouch]

Apply aesthetic and makeup effects to faces in your pictures.

→ [Playback] → [Beauty Retouch]

1Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

2Press to select the face of the person to edit, and

press [MENU/SET]

• Only a person with an arrow can be selected.

• If only one person is detected, press [MENU/SET].

3Perform the setting by touching the retouch item ( ),

the effect ( ), and the detailed settings of the effect

( ) in order

OKOK

[Aesthetic

Retouch]

([Clear Skin]) Reduces blemishes and dullness in the skin

while bringing out clearness.

([Shine Removal]) Shiny areas of the skin are matted down.

([Whitening]) Eyes and teeth are whitened and beautified.

([Lift Up]) Face lines are sharpened.

([Eye Emphasis]) Eyes look bigger and defined.

[Foundation] — Adjusts foundation color.

[Make Up

Retouch]

([Lip Color]) Color of the lips is adjusted to highlight the

texture.

([Cheek Color]) Emphasizes structure of face through selection

of color.

([Eye Shadow]) Raises level of gorgeousness through color

selection.

[Smile] — Give the subject a smile.

4Touch [OK]

• When [Ye s ] is selected at the confirmation screen, a screen comparing the original picture to the

retouched picture is displayed.

5Touch [Set] or press [MENU/SET]

209 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

●You cannot retouch two or more people at once. Save the picture once and then select the next

person.

●The brightness or color between a picture viewed before saving and the saved picture may be

different.

●If the subject is wearing glasses or the face cannot be detected properly, you may not be able to

retouch the face as desired.

●When a picture is bright due to reflected light from a flash or the sun, the retouching effect may be

less pronounced.

●To take a still picture suitable for [Beauty Retouch]:

• Take a close-up picture of the face from the front

• Avoid taking a picture under very low lighting conditions

• Take a clear picture of the area that you want to retouch

●With certain image coloring, such as that of black and white images, the retouching effect may not

work.

●Edit group pictures one by one. The edited pictures will be newly saved separately from the

original group pictures.

●Not available when the viewfinder is in use.

●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, [Beauty Retouch] is disabled.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama pictures

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Pictures in which faces cannot be detected

●Reallusion is a trademark of Reallusion Inc.

210 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[RAW Processing]

You can use the camera to develop still pictures that were recorded in RAW format. The

created still pictures are saved in JPEG format.

→ [Playback] → [RAW Processing]

1Press to select RAW file and press [MENU/SET]

2Press to select the item and then press

[MENU/SET] to set

• The following items can be set. The settings used during

recording are applied at the time of setting.

• The setting methods vary depending on the item. For details,

refer to “Setting each item” (→211).

[White Balance]

You can select White Balance to make adjustments. When you select an

item with [ ], you can develop the pictures using the same settings that

were applied for recording.

[Exposure Comp.] You can perform Exposure Compensation in the range from –1 EV to

+1 EV.

[Photo Style] You can select the [Photo Style] effects ([Standard], [Vivid], [Natural],

[Monochrome], [Scenery], or [Portrait]).

[i.Dynamic] You can select the [i.Dynamic] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW], or

[OFF]).

[Contrast] You can adjust the contrast.

[Highlight] You can adjust the brightness of a highlighted area.

[Shadow] You can adjust the brightness of a shadowed area.

[Saturation] /

[Color Tone]

You can adjust the saturation. (You can adjust the coloring when

[Monochrome] is selected for [Photo Style].)

[Filter Effect] You can select a Filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] is selected for

[Photo Style].)

[Noise Reduction] You can set noise reduction.

[i.Resolution] You can select the [i.Resolution] settings ([HIGH], [STANDARD], [LOW],

[EXTENDED], or [OFF]).

[Sharpness] You can adjust the impression of resolution.

[Setup]

Use to select items and press [MENU/SET] to perform the following

operations.

[Reinstate Adjustments]: You can restore the settings to the ones used

during recording.

[Picture Size]: You can select the picture size ([L], [M], or [S]) of a JPEG

file when saving pictures.

211 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

3Press [MENU/SET] to finalize the setting

• The screen in step 2 reappears. To set another item, repeat steps 2 to 3.

4Press to select [Begin Processing] and press [MENU/SET]

■Setting each item

When you select an item, the setting screen appears.

Operation Touch

operation Description

Drag Used to make adjustments

[WB K Set]

Used to display the color

temperature setting screen (→110)

(Only when [White Balance] is set

to [ ])

[Adjust.]

Used to display the White Balance

fine adjustment screen (→112)

(Only when [White Balance] is set)

[DISP.] [DISP.] Used to display the comparison

screen

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Used to finalize an adjustment you

just made and to return to the item

selection screen

SetSet

SetSetAdjust.Adjust.

• If you have selected [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the comparison

screen is not displayed.

• Pictures can be enlarged by operating the zoom lever.

• You can also zoom in by quickly touching the touch screen twice. (If the display was

enlarged, it returns to the same magnification ratio.)

212 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

The following operating methods are available to make adjustments on the comparison

screen.

Current setting

Operation Touch

operation Description

Drag Used to make adjustments

[DISP.] [DISP.] Used to return to the setting screen

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Used to finalize an adjustment you

just made and to return to the item

selection screen

SetSet

• If you touch the picture at the center, it will be enlarged. If you touch [ ], the picture

will be reduced to the original size.

●The result of a RAW file developed by this camera and a RAW file developed by the software

“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” (→269) will not be exactly the same.

●Regardless of the aspect ratio of the picture during recording, a RAW image recorded on this

camera is always recorded with the aspect ratio set to [4:3] (5184×3888), but if you perform [RAW

Processing] from the [Playback] menu, the picture will be processed with the aspect ratio fixed as

that at the time of recording.

●Edit group pictures one by one. The edited pictures will be newly saved separately from the

original group pictures.

●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, [RAW Processing] is disabled.

●You can perform RAW processing on pictures recorded using this unit only.

[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

You can bulk save 5 seconds’ worth of 4K recording from a 4K burst file.

→ [Playback] → [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

1Use to select the 4K burst files and press [MENU/SET]

• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all the frames can be saved as a picture.

2Select the first frame to be bulk saved as a picture (→118, 119)

• The picture will be saved in JPEG format as a single burst picture group (→166).

213 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Light Composition]

Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image

that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame

to combine the frames into one picture.

→ [Playback] → [Light Composition]

1Use to select the 4K burst files and press [MENU/SET]

2Choose the combining method and press [MENU/SET]

■[Composite Merging]: Selecting frames to combine

Drag the slide bar or use to select the frames to combine

Press [MENU/SET]

• The selected frames are remembered, and the display goes to

the preview screen.

• Use to select items and press [MENU/SET] to perform

the following operations.

– [Next]: Lets you select more frames for combining.

– [Reselect]: Discards the frame selected immediately before

and lets you select a different image.

Repeat steps - to select more frames to combine (up to 40 frames)

Press to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET]

■[Range Merging]: Selecting a range to combine

Select the frame of the first picture and then press [MENU/SET]

• The selection method is the same as in step of [Composite Merging] setting.

Select the frame of the last picture and then press [MENU/SET]

3Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen and press [MENU/SET]

• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first frame

such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.

214 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Clear Retouch]

You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken.

• The erasure operation can only be

performed by touching. [Clear Retouch]

automatically enables the touch

operation.

→ [Playback] → [Clear Retouch]

1Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

SetSet

UndoUndo

SCALINGSCALING

REMOVEREMOVE

2Drag your finger over the part you want to erase

• The parts to be erased are colored.

• Touching [Undo] will return the colored part back to its previous

state.

Erasing details (enlarging the display)

SetSet

Undo

SCALINGSCALING

REMOVE

Touch [SCALING]

• On the touch screen, pinch out your two fingers to zoom in, and

pinch in your two fingers to zoom out (→42).

• Dragging the screen allows you to move the enlarged part.

Touch [REMOVE]

• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging your finger

over the part you want to erase. The part you want to erase can

be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.

3Touch [Set]

4Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET]

●Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.

●Edit group pictures one by one. The edited pictures will be newly saved separately from the

original group pictures.

●Not available when the viewfinder is in use.

●When an HDMI micro cable is connected, [Clear Retouch] is disabled.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama pictures

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

215 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Title Edit]

You can enter characters (titles etc.) on a recorded picture. After text has been registered,

it can be stamped in prints using [Text Stamp] (→216).

→ [Playback] → [Title Edit]

1Select a still picture (→204)

• [ ] is displayed for pictures with texts already stamped.

2Enter characters

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

• To delete texts, delete all the characters in the character input screen.

●You can print out texts using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268).

●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ], [ ] or [ ]

216 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Text Stamp]

You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel destination, travel dates, etc.

on the recorded still pictures.

→ [Playback] → [Text Stamp]

1Select a still picture (→204)

• [ ] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.

2Use to select [Set] and press [MENU/SET]

[Shooting Date] [W/O TIME]: Stamp recording date

[WITH TIME]: Stamp recording date and time

[Name] : Stamp name registered in Face Recognition

: Stamp name registered in [Profile Setup]

[Location] Stamp location registered in [Setup] menu’s [Travel Date]

[Travel Date] Stamp number of days that have elapsed since the travel date set in [Setup]

menu’s [Travel Date]

[Title] Stamp text registered in [Title Edit]

3Press [Q.MENU/ ] button

4Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

●Do not request date printing in store or make date printing on printer for still pictures with

date stamps. (Date printing may be overlapped.)

●You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

●The picture quality may be coarser.

●If you stamp text on the pictures in a group, those pictures are saved as new pictures.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

• Still pictures taken without setting clock

217 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Video Divide]

A single motion picture can be split into 2 parts. This is convenient when you want to keep

just the necessary scenes, or if you wish to delete unnecessary scenes to increase free

space on your card, such as when traveling.

→ [Playback] → [Video Divide]

1Use to select a motion picture to split and press [MENU/SET]

2Press at where you want to split a motion picture to

pause it

• If you press while paused, you can make finer adjustments

to the splitting positions in a motion picture.

3Press

• The original motion picture that was split does not remain.

(There will only be the 2 motion pictures that were created after

the split.)

●During dividing, do not turn off the camera or remove the card or battery. If you do so, the motion

picture may be deleted.

●Motion pictures cannot be divided at a location close to the start or end of the motion picture.

●This function is not available in the following case:

• Motion pictures with a short recording time

[Time Lapse Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Time Lapse Shot]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording format.

→ [Playback] → [Time Lapse Video]

1Use to select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group and press

[MENU/SET]

2Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• For details, refer to step 4 and the subsequent steps (→136).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→136).

218 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Stop Motion Video]

You can create a motion picture from the pictures in a group that was recorded using

[Stop Motion Animation]. The motion picture you created is saved in the MP4 recording

format.

→ [Playback] → [Stop Motion Video]

1Use to select a stop motion animation group and press [MENU/SET]

2Create a motion picture after selecting a production method

• For details, refer to step 7 and the subsequent steps (→138).

For details on the motion picture you created, refer to (→139).

[Resize]

Picture size can be reduced to facilitate e-mail attachment and use in web pages, etc.

→ [Playback] → [Resize]

1Select a still picture and size

[Single]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

SetSet

[Multi] (up to 100 pictures)

Use to select size and press [MENU/SET]

Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

(repeat)

• To cancel → Press [MENU/SET] again.

Use to select [OK] and press [MENU/SET]

●Picture quality is reduced after resizing.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Group pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

219 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Cropping]

Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.

→ [Playback] → [Cropping]

1Use to select a still picture and press [MENU/SET]

2Select area to crop and press [MENU/SET]

• You can also touch [ ] / [ ] to enlarge/reduce.

• You can also move by dragging on the screen.

Enlarge Change

position

●Edit group pictures one by one. The edited pictures will be newly saved separately from the

original group pictures.

●Original Face Recognition information will not be copied when still pictures are cropped.

●Picture quality is reduced after cropping.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

• Panorama pictures

• Still pictures that other texts had already been stamped

[Rotate]

You can manually rotate the picture in 90-degree units.

• You cannot select [Rotate] when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].

→ [Playback] → [Rotate]

1Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select the rotation direction and press

[MENU/SET]

[ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise.

[ ]: Rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise.

220 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Rotate Disp.]

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the

camera vertically.

→ [Playback] → [Rotate Disp.] → [ON]

●When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless the

OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording

information, etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information

Technology Industries Association)”.

[Favorite]

You can label your favorite pictures with a star [ ]. (This lets you collectively delete all

pictures except your favorites when deleting pictures.)

→ [Playback] → [Favorite]

1Select picture (→204)

■To clear all

Select [Favorite] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●Up to 999 pictures can be set.

●Only when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play], you can select [Cancel].

●This function is not available in the following case:

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

221 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Print Set]

Picture/picture no./date printing settings can be made for when printing with DPOF

print-compatible shops or printers. (Contact the local photo printing store or read

operating instructions of the printer to check if DPOF is supported.)

For more information visit:

http://panasonic.jp/dc/dpof_110/white_e.htm

→ [Playback] → [Print Set]

1Select a still picture (→204)

2Use to set number of still pictures and press [MENU/SET] (up to 999

pictures)

(Repeat steps 1 and 2 when using [Multi])

• Date print setting/release → Press .

■To clear all

Select [Print Set] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

●When you have performed [Print Set] for pictures in a group, the setting for how many prints to

make applies to all pictures in the group, and the number of prints set and total number of prints

are shown on the print settings icon of the first picture. If the total number of pictures is 1,000 or

higher, [999+] is displayed.

●Date print setting cannot be made for pictures with a [Text Stamp] applied.

●Depending on the type of printer, the printer settings may take priority over camera settings.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Motion pictures

• 4K burst files

• Pictures recorded using [Post Focus]

• Still pictures recorded with the [Quality] setting [ ]

222 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Protect]

Set protection to disable picture deletion. Prevents deletion of important pictures.

→ [Playback] → [Protect]

1Select picture (→204)

■To clear all

Select [Protect] → [Cancel] → [Yes], and then press [MENU/SET]

When you set the write-protect switch on the card to the “LOCK” position, the picture is not

erased.

●The picture is erased when formatting, even if it is protected.

●May not be effective when using other devices.

[Face Rec Edit]

Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with incorrect information.

→ [Playback] → [Face Rec Edit] → [REPLACE] or [DELETE]

1Use to select picture and press [MENU/SET]

2Use to select a person and press [MENU/SET]

• If [DELETE], go to step 4.

3Use to select the person to replace for another and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select [Yes] and press [MENU/SET]

●When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot be restored.

●Edit the Face Recognition information in group units for a picture group. (You cannot edit the

information for each picture in a group.)

●You can edit only the first picture in a group.

223 DVQP1285

Using Menu Functions

Menu list

[Picture Sort]

You can set the display sequence used for playing back pictures on this unit.

→ [Playback] → [Picture Sort]

[FILE NAME]

Displays pictures in the folder name or file name sequence. This display

format allows you to find the storage location of a picture on a card more

easily.

[DATE/TIME]

Displays pictures according to the date and time that the pictures were taken

in chronological order. When the pictures are taken using several cameras

and stored on the same card, this display format allows you to find a specific

picture more easily.

●Pictures may not be displayed according to the [DATE/TIME] sequence immediately after a card

is inserted into this unit. In that case, wait a while, and the pictures will be displayed in the [DATE/

TIME] sequence.

224 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

What you can do with the Wi-Fi® function

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone/tablet

(→228)

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone

Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

Writing the location information on pictures in the camera

Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to your

preference on a smartphone

Connect easily

You can easily set up a direct connection to your smartphone without entering a password.

Displaying still pictures on a TV (→238)

Wireless printing (→243)

Sending pictures to AV device (→244)

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV device in the home (home AV

device).

Sending pictures to a PC (→245)

Using WEB services (→247)

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. You can receive still pictures and motion pictures on a PC or a

smartphone/tablet using the Cloud Sync. Service.

• Hereafter, this manual uses the term “smartphone” for both smartphones and tablets

unless it is necessary to distinguish between them.

225 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

■Before Use

• Complete the date and time settings in advance. (→30)

• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device

equipped with the wireless LAN function is required.

■Lighting of the Wi-Fi connection lamp when the Wi-Fi function is in use

Lit: When the Wi-Fi function is ON or connected by

Wi-Fi

Blinking: When sending picture data

■About the [Wi-Fi] button

In this Owner’s Manual, a function button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred to as the

[Wi-Fi] button. (At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn5] button in recording

mode, and [Fn1] in playback mode.)

• For details on the function button, refer to (→48).

To start up the Wi-Fi function (When in recording mode):

Touch [ ]

226 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

■Operations that can be performed by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button

If you press the [Wi-Fi] button when you do not have a Wi-Fi connection, the

camera enters a standby mode in which it can connect directly to the smartphone.

(→229)

• If you press the [DISP.] button at that time, you can select a destination from the history

of previous connections and quickly connect. (→259)

When the camera is connected to Wi-Fi, you can press [Wi-Fi] button and perform

the following operations.

[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.

[Change the Destination] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to

select a different Wi-Fi connection.

[Change Settings for Sending Images] For details (→241).

[Register the Current Destination to

Favorite]

Registering the current connection destination or the

connection method, you can easily connect with the

same connection method next time.

[Network Address]For details (→261).

• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may not

be able to perform some of these operations.

227 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Function

■Describing method

When selecting “[Select a destination from History]”, etc. is

described in a step, perform any of the following operations.

With cursor button operations

Use cursor button to select [Select a destination from History]

and press [MENU/SET].

With touch screen operations

Touch [Select a destination from History].

●Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception while

sending images.

●The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

●Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless

access point.

●We recommend that you use a fully charged battery when you send pictures.

●When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred

depending on the details of your contract.

●Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is

terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.

228 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a

smartphone

You can remotely operate the camera using a smartphone.

The “Panasonic Image App” (hereafter “Image App”) must be installed on your

smartphone.

Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”

Supported OS Android™: Android 4.1 or later

iOS: iOS 8.0 or later

Installation

procedure

Connect your device to a network

(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”

(iOS) Select “App Store”

Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” into the search box

Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OS versions as of May 2017. Supported OS versions may be changed

without prior notice.

• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone

being used.

For the latest information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/ (This site is available in English only.)

• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may

be incurred depending on the details of your contract.

• For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.

• When you operate the “Image App” on the smartphone that is connected to the

camera via Wi-Fi, [Help] in the “Image App” may not be displayed depending on the

smartphone. In this case, after terminating the connection to the camera, reconnect the

smartphone to a mobile phone network such as the 3G or LTE network or to a Wi-Fi

router, and then display [Help] in the “Image App”.

• Some of the screens and information provided in this document may be different

depending on the supported operating system and “Image App” version.

229 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Connecting to a smartphone

Connecting without using the password

You can easily establish a Wi-Fi connection on this unit without entering a password on

your smartphone.

(On the camera)

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View]

SSID

• The information required for directly connecting your smartphone to

this unit (SSID) is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on

the camera.

(On your smartphone)

1Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu

2Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the camera

3Start “Image App” (→228)

• When the connection confirmation screen appears on the camera, select

[Yes] and press [MENU/SET]. (Only when making a connection for the

first time.)

[Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF] at the time of purchase. When you start a Wi-Fi

connection, be sure to verify that the device displayed on the camera’s connection

confirmation screen is really the device you want to connect to. Even if the wrong device

is displayed, you will still be connected to it if you select “Yes”.

If there seem to be other Wi-Fi enabled devices in the vicinity, we recommend that you

set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (→230, 231, 261).

230 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Using a password to set up a connection

When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON], you can strengthen security by using manual input

or a QR code for password authentication.

Preparation

(On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (→261)

■When reading a QR Code to connect

(On the camera)

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View]

SSID and Password

QR Code

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on

the camera.

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→228)

Select “QR code”

• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display QR

code.

• (For iOS devices) A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select [OK] to proceed.

Use the “Image App” to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera

• If you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR code will be enlarged.

•For iOS devices only

Install the profile

• If the smartphone is locked with a passcode, enter the passcode to unlock the smartphone.

Press the home button to close the browser

Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu

On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on the

camera

Start “Image App”

• (iOS devices) Steps through are not required from the second

time on.

231 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Manually entering a password to set up a connection

(On the camera)

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View]

SSID and Password

QR Code

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to this unit is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on

the camera.

(On your smartphone)

Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu

On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on the

camera

Enter the password displayed on the camera (For first time

connection only)

• If you are using an Android device, marking the box for password display

will allow the device to display the password as you enter it.

Start “Image App” (→228)

Changing the connection method

To change the connection method, follow the steps below:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [New Connection] → [Remote Shooting & View]

→ [DISP.] button

→ [DISP.] button → [New Connection]

→ [Remote Shooting & View] → [DISP.] button

232 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■When connecting with [Via Network]

(On the camera)

Select [Via Network] and press [MENU/SET]

• Connect the camera to a wireless access point by following the connection method (→256).

(On your smartphone)

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the wireless access point you connected to the camera, and set

Start “Image App” (→228)

■When connecting with [Direct]

(On the camera)

Select [Direct] and press [MENU/SET]

• Connect the camera to the smartphone by following the connection method (→258).

(On your smartphone)

Start “Image App” (→228)

Closing the connection

1Set the camera to Recording Mode

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to recording mode.

2Select the camera’s menu items to terminate the Wi-Fi

connection

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [Yes]

• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button

on the camera (→226).

3On the smartphone, close “Image App”

From the “Image App” screen, press the home button to close the app

From the “Image App” screen, press the back button twice to close the app

• When recording with 4K Pre-Burst with the smartphone, terminate the connection only

after switching to 4K Burst recording by pressing [Q.MENU/ ] button on the camera.

233 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Taking pictures via a smartphone (remote recording)

1Connect to a smartphone (→229)

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

Take pictures

• The recorded images are saved in the camera.

• Some settings are not available.

●When using zoom, the camera could tilt when the lens barrel extends. Make sure to secure the

camera in place with a tripod or by other means.

●This function is not available in the following cases:

• Panorama Shot Mode

• When using [Time Lapse Shot]

Taking a picture while jumping

When you hold your smartphone and jump, the camera’s shutter can be released automatically as the

smartphone detects the peak of the jump.

1Operate the smartphone

[ ] → [ ] → Select the sensitivity

• [ ] will be displayed on the remote recording screen of the smartphone.

• We recommend that you take test pictures.

• For details about the operating procedure, refer to [Help] in the “Image App”.

234 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Playing back pictures in the camera on a smartphone

1Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Switch the

device of the

pictures to be

displayed

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a device of pictures to be displayed using the icon at

the top left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved

in the camera.

• When the picture is touched, it is played back at a larger size.

• When playing back motion pictures, the data size is reduced during transmission of

motion pictures to “Image App”. Therefore, the picture quality may be different from the

actual motion picture that you have recorded. Depending on your smartphone and its

usage environment, you may notice degradation in the picture quality or skipping of

sound when playing back motion pictures and still pictures.

Saving pictures in the camera to a smartphone

1Connect to a smartphone (→229)

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a device of pictures to be displayed using the icon at

the top left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to display a picture saved

in the camera.

Press and hold the picture and drag it to save it on the

smartphone

●RAW still pictures, AVCHD motion pictures, MP4 motion pictures for which the [Rec Quality] size is

[4K], 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be saved.

235 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Sending pictures in the camera to social networking services

1Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Switch the

device of the

pictures to be

displayed

2Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• You can switch a device of pictures to

be displayed using the icon at the top

left on the screen. Select [LUMIX] to

display a picture saved in the camera.

Press and hold the picture and drag

it to send it to the social networking

service, etc.

• The picture will be sent to the social

networking service or other WEB

services.

Adding location information to pictures in the camera from a

smartphone

You can send the location information acquired from a smartphone to the camera. After

the information is sent, you can write it on the pictures in the camera.

GPS

Starts location information recording

Start the recording

Ends location information recording

Sends and writes the location

information

• You can also use [Location Logging] in the [Playback] menu to write the sent location

information to the pictures.

• Location information that is different from the information acquired during recording may

be written. Take care regarding the following matters.

– Set [Home] of [World Time] of the camera to your home area.

– Once a smartphone starts recording the location information, do not change the

[Home] setting of [World Time] of the camera.

• The location information cannot be written to pictures recorded without setting [Clock

Set].

236 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

■Recording location information and taking pictures

Start recording the location information on your smartphone

Start “Image App” (→228)

Select [ ]

Select [ Start geotagging]

Take pictures using the camera

End recording of the location information on your smartphone

Select [ Stop geotagging] to end recording of location information

■Writing location information to a picture

Preparation

(On the camera) Connect to a smartphone. (→229)

Operate the smartphone

Start “Image App”

Select [ ]

Select [ ] to send or write location information

• Follow the messages on the screen to perform the operation.

• [ ] is displayed for pictures that have location information written to it.

●The smartphone battery drains faster while location information is being recorded. When recording

of location information is not necessary, stop it.

●For details about the operating procedure, etc., refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu.

• On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the

transfer status of location information

●The location information cannot be written in the following cases:

• Images recorded after location information was sent to the camera

• Pictures that already have location information

• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format

237 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Operating the camera by connecting it to a smartphone

Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie

according to your preference on a smartphone

Using a smartphone, you can combine motion pictures recorded with the camera’s [Snap

Movie] function (→158). Music can be added to motion pictures to be combined. In

addition, you can save the combined motion picture or upload it on a web service.

Record motion pictures

with [Snap Movie]

Send the recorded

motion pictures

Edit

WEB

services

Combine the motion

pictures, save the

combined motion picture,

and send it to a web

service

Combine the motion

pictures, and save the

combined motion picture

■Combining motion pictures by operating a smartphone

Connect to a smartphone (→229)

Operate the smartphone

Select [ ]

• [Snap Movie] motion pictures with recent recording dates will be selected and automatically

sent to the smartphone.

• When motion pictures with recent recording dates are not available, a screen that lets you

select motion pictures will be displayed. Select motion pictures and send them.

Operate the smartphone to edit the motion pictures

• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate [Snap Movie] of

“Image App”.

●[Snap Movie] of the “Image App” requires a smartphone that supports Android OS 4.3 or higher.

●The iPhone 4 does not support [Snap Movie] of the “Image App”.

238 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Displaying still pictures on a TV

You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA certified digital

media renderer (DMR) function.

Preparation

Set the TV to DLNA waiting Mode.

• Read the operating instructions for your TV.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Playback on TV]

1Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→256, 258)

2Select the device you wish to connect to

• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.

3Take or play back still pictures on this unit

• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes]

(You can also close the connection by pressing the [Wi-Fi] button. (→226))

●When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not output using 4K

resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro

cable. (→264)

●When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before the

connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.

●Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled when the pictures are

played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.

●Motion pictures and 4K burst files cannot be played back.

●During Multi Playback, Calendar Playback, or when selecting a focus position from a picture

recorded in [Post Focus], pictures displayed on the screen of the camera are not displayed on the

TV.

239 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then

select the method of sending pictures.

After you have completed connecting, you can also change

the sending settings, such as the size of pictures to be sent.

■Images that can be sent

Destination JPEG RAW MP4*1AVCHD*1, *2

4K Burst File*1

Pictures recorded in

[Post Focus]*1

[Smartphone] (→242) ○–○*3– –

[PC] (→245) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

[Cloud Sync. Service]

(→250) ○–○*3– –

[Web service] (→247) ○–○*3– –

[AV device] (→244) ○– – – –

[Printer]*1 (→243) ○– – – –

*1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.

*2 Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.

*3 Excluding motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K].

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• For more information about picture playback, see the operating instructions of the

destination device, or check the WEB service to which you will send the pictures.

[Send Images While Recording]

A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.

• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen while connected by

[Send Images While Recording], and [ ] is displayed while

files are being sent.

• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [Yes ]

• You can terminate the connection or change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi]

button. (→226)

You cannot change the settings while sending a still picture. Wait until sending is

complete.

Sending pictures

240 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures

●Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.

●If you turn off the camera before you have completed sending, or if you close the Wi-Fi

connection, or in similar situations, unsent files will not be resent.

●You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.

●If you set [Time Lapse Shot], the Wi-Fi connection is terminated and you cannot use this function.

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

You can select and send recorded images.

■How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single Select] or [Multi Select]

[Single Select]

Select the picture

SetSet

Select [Set]

[Multi Select]

Select the picture (repeat)

• If selected again, the setting will be canceled.

2 3

4 5 6

Select [OK]

• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select] is

limited.

• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been

sent, press [DISP.] button. To close the connection, select [Exit].

●Details of the [Playback] menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent.

●Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent.

●Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent.

241 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures

Changing the settings for sending images

After you have completed connecting, you can change the sending settings, such as the

size of pictures to be sent, by pressing the [DISP.] button.

[Size]

Resize the image to send.

[Original] / [Auto]*1 / [Change]

• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the

circumstances at the destination.

• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S], or [VGA].

The aspect ratio does not change.

[File Format]*2[JPG] / [RAW+JPG] / [RAW]

[Delete Location Data]*3

Select whether to delete the location information from images before

sending them.

[ON]: Delete the location information, then send.

[OFF]: Keep the location information and send.

• This operation only deletes the location information from the

images that are set to be sent. (The location information will not

be deleted from the original images stored in this unit.)

[Cloud Limit]*4

You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs

out of free space.

[ON]: Do not send images.

[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.

*1 Only available when the destination is set to [Web service].

*2 Only available when the destination is set to [PC].

*3 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service] or [Web service].

*4 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service].

242 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Preparation

Install “Image App” in advance. (→228)

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Smartphone]

1Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→256, 258)

(On your smartphone)

■When connecting with [Via Network]

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select a wireless access point and set

Start “Image App”

■When connecting with [WPS Connection]* in [Direct]

Start “Image App”

* WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the connection

and security of wireless LAN devices. To check if the smartphone you are using is compatible

with WPS, refer to the instruction manual of the smartphone.

■When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]

Set Wi-Fi function to “ON”

Select the SSID displayed on this unit

Start “Image App”

2Select the device you wish to connect to

3Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

[Send Images While Recording]

4Take a still picture (→239)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

4Select the picture (→240)

Sending pictures to a smartphone

243 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Wireless printing

You can print out recorded still pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless

LAN-compatible)* printer.

* Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.

Contact the printer manufacturers for details on PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images Stored in the Camera] → [Printer]

1Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→256, 258)

2Select a printer you want to connect

3Select the still picture and print

• Pictures are selected the same way as when connecting by USB connection cable. For details

(→273).

• To terminate the connection, press [Q.MENU/ ] button.

●Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be printed.

244 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to AV device

Still pictures and motion pictures can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV

devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.

Wireless access point

Home AV device

Preparations

When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting mode.

• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [AV device]

1Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→256, 258)

2Select the device you wish to connect to

3Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

[Send Images While Recording]

4Take a still picture (→239)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

4Select the picture (→240)

●Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take a

while.

245 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

Still pictures and motion pictures recorded by the camera can be sent to a PC.

Preparations

• Turn the computer on.

• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC before sending a picture to the PC (below).

• If the standard settings are changed for the workgroup on the connected PC, you must change

settings in [PC Connection] on this unit. (→261)

To create a folder that receives images

• Create a PC user account (account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to

32 characters)) consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive

folder may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters.

■When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on the PC (→268)

Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

■When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

(For Windows)

Supported OS: Windows 10 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7

Example: Windows 7

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click

Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

(For Mac)

Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.12

Example: OS X v10.8

Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the following

order

[File] → [Get Info]

Enable sharing of the folder

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the operating system.

246 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Sending pictures to a PC

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [PC]

1Select [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect (→256, 258)

2Select the PC you want to connect to

• If the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], then enter the computer

name (for Mac, enter the NetBIOS name).

3Select the folder you want to send to

4Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

[Send Images While Recording]

5Take a still picture (→239)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

5Select the picture (→240)

●Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in those

folders.

●If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC.

●If the computer name (for Mac, the NetBIOS name) contains spaces, etc., the name may not be

properly recognized. If you cannot connect, we recommend changing the computer name (for

Mac, the NetBIOS name) to a combination of 15 or less alphanumeric characters only.

●If a firewall is enabled by the OS or security software, this unit may be unable to connect to the

computer.

247 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Through “LUMIX CLUB”, you can send still pictures and motion pictures to social

networking services, etc. By selecting the setting to automatically transfer still pictures

and motion pictures to [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive the transferred still pictures

and motion pictures on a PC or a smartphone.

Wireless access point

WEB services

Cloud

synchronization

services

LUMIX CLUB

When sending images to WEB service

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→251) to send a picture to a WEB service.

To send images to a WEB service, you need to register the WEB service. (→248)

●Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.

of images uploaded on WEB services.

●When uploading images to the WEB service, do not delete images from this camera, even

after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly

uploaded to the WEB service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages

resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.

●Images uploaded to the WEB service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check

images by accessing the WEB service with your smartphone or computer.

●If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address

registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.

248 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB”

Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Preparation

Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the login

information available.

1Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

2Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service

3If you have not registered your email address with “LUMIX CLUB”, register the

email address

4Select the WEB service to be used for WEB service link settings and register it

• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.

Sending pictures

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Web service]

1Select [Via Network] and connect (→256)

2Select a WEB service you want to connect

3Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

[Send Images While Recording]

4Take a still picture (→239)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

4Select the picture (→240)

249 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

■Quickly sending pictures in the camera to WEB services

Once you send a picture, you can send pictures to the WEB service as quickly and easily

as using a smartphone, only when the environment for connecting to a wireless access

point is available.

(The instructions below assume that you are already registered to “LUMIX CLUB”

and the camera has a record of a connection to a wireless access point.)

Display the picture

Press , and then press to select [Yes]

(When you play back group pictures one by one, press

and then select [Upload(Wi-Fi)] or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)].)

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

(When selecting a group picture, touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and then

[ ], and then select [Upload(Wi-Fi)] or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)].)

Select a WEB service you want to connect

Check the send settings, and select [Set]

The camera is connected to the previously used wireless access point and the pictures are sent to

the WEB service.

• Step , are not necessary when you continue to send another image.

• To change the transmission setting for the picture, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the playback

screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi] button on the camera. (→226)

To change the settings for sending images or web service

Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step and onwards again.

• You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] button while using a Wi-Fi

connection. (→226)

●If the camera has no records of connections to wireless access points that are available, a screen

that asks you to select a connection method is displayed. Select the connection method and

connect the camera to a wireless access point. (→256)

●When you are not registered to “LUMIX CLUB”, a screen that asks you to acquire a new login ID is

displayed. Get a login ID and set a password. (→252)

●When pictures are displayed as a group, they are all sent. When a single picture in a group is

displayed, only the picture being displayed is sent.

250 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using WEB services

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]

Preparation

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (→251) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to send a picture

to a Cloud Folder. Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→268) on a PC or “Image App” on a smartphone to

configure the Cloud Sync. settings.

■About the images sent to a Cloud Folder by the use of [Cloud Sync. Service]

(Current as of May 2017)

• If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are

temporarily saved in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronized with the device in

use, such as the PC or smartphone.

• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1,000 pictures).

Transferred images are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer. Furthermore,

when the number of stored images exceeds 1,000, some images may be deleted

depending on the [Cloud Limit] (→241) setting even within 30 days after the transfer.

• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is

complete, images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the

transfer.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] / [Send Images Stored in the Camera]

→ [Cloud Sync. Service]

1Select [Via Network] and connect (→256)

2Check the send settings, and select [Set]

• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.] button. (→241)

[Send Images While Recording]

3Take a still picture (→239)

[Send Images Stored in the Camera]

3Select the picture (→240)

251 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

About the [LUMIX CLUB]

Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).

If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronize images between the

devices you are using, or transfer these images to WEB services.

Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to WEB services.

• You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (→253)

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Please note;

• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected problems,

and service contents may be changed or added to, without prior notice to the users.

• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance

notice.

252 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

→ [Set/Add Account] → [New account]

• Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has already been acquired for the

camera. Select [Yes] to acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire a

new login ID.

1Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set (→256)

• The settings screen will only appear during the first connection. Connection methods set on this

unit are stored and will be used for subsequent connections. If you want to change the wireless

access point to connect to, press the [DISP.] button, then change the connecting destination.

• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

2Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree]

• You can press to switch pages.

• Turn the zoom lever to the T side to enlarge the page display (x2 magnification).

• If you turn the zoom lever to the W side after enlarging the page, the page returns to its original

size (no magnification).

• You can use to move the position of the area to be enlarged.

• Press [Q.MENU/ ] button to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID.

3Enter the password

• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

4Check the login ID and select [OK]

• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.

When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the numbers.

• A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Select [OK].

• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.

253 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Using a previously acquired login ID/confirming and changing login ID

and password ([Set Login ID])

Preparation

To use a previously acquired login ID, confirm your ID and password.

To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from your

smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in advance.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

→ [Set/Add Account] → [Set Login ID]

• The login ID and password are displayed.

• The password is displayed as “ ”.

• Close the menu if only checking the login ID.

1Select the item you wish to change

2Enter your login ID or password

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera.

To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone

Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending

images on this unit to other devices or WEB services.

■When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID

Connect this unit to the smartphone (→229)

From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID

• After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID

may appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login

ID by following the on-screen instructions.

■When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs

When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit

Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the smartphone.

When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone

Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this unit.

254 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

Using “LUMIX CLUB”

Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB] → [Terms of use]

Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.

You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

• Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with

the camera.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup] → [LUMIX CLUB]

→ [Delete account]

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

1Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

2Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account

• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID. Exit the

menu after it is executed.

3Select [Next]

• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is displayed.

Select [OK].

255 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

The following types of connections are available.

[New Connection] Connect after selecting the Wi-Fi function

and destination. (→229, 238, 239)

[Select a destination from

History]

Connect using the same settings as a

previous Wi-Fi connection. (→259)

[Select a destination from

Favorite]

Connect using settings registered to

Favorite.

When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select a connection method.

• Example of operation for displaying a screen:

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function] → [New Connection]

→ [Send Images While Recording] → [Smartphone]

Wireless access point

[Via Network] Connects through a wireless access point. (→256)

[Direct]

Your device connects directly to this unit.

(If you are out and unable to use your wireless access

point, or temporarily connecting to equipment you do not

ordinarily use, or in a similar situation, it is convenient to

make a direct connection.)

(→258)

256 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

Connecting via a wireless access point ([Via Network])

Select a connection method to the wireless access point.

• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure

the settings related to the connection and security of

wireless LAN devices. To check if the wireless access

point you are using is compatible with WPS, refer to the

instruction manual of the wireless access point.

[WPS (Push-Button)]

Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark.

1Press the wireless access point WPS button until it

switches to WPS Mode

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[WPS (PIN code)]

Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark.

1On the camera screen, select the wireless access point

you are connecting to

2Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen

into the wireless access point

3Press [MENU/SET] on the camera

• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for details.

[From List]

Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS compatibility,

or when you want to search for and connect to a wireless access

point.

If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility

(connecting by [From List])

Search for available wireless access points.

• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network

authentication is encrypted.

• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, network authentication type,

encryption type, encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.

257 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

1Select the wireless access point you are connecting to

• Pressing [DISP.] button will search for a wireless access point

again.

• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When connecting

with [Manual Input]” (→257).

2(If network authentication is encrypted)

Enter the encryption key

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

■When connecting with [Manual Input]

On the screen of step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting

by [From List])”, select [Manual Input]

Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

Select the network authentication type

• For information on network authentication, see the instruction manual of the wireless access

point.

Select the encryption type

• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network

authentication settings.

Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set

[WPA2-PSK] / [WPA-PSK] [TKIP] / [AES]

[Common Key] [WEP]

[Open] [No Encryption] / [WEP]

(When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key

●Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless access

point.

●If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak.

Refer to “Message displays” (→284) and “Q&A Troubleshooting” (→290) for details.

●Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is used

in.

258 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

Connecting directly ([Direct])

Select a connection method with which your equipment is

compatible.

• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

[WPS Connection]

[WPS (Push-Button)]

1On the camera screen, select [WPS (Push-Button)]

2Set the device to WPS mode

• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing the [DISP.] button on

this unit.

[WPS (PIN code)]

1On the camera screen, select [WPS (PIN code)]

2Enter the PIN code of the device into the camera

[Manual

Connection]

1Enter the SSID and password

into the device. The SSID and

password are displayed on the

connection waiting screen of this

unit

SSID and Password

• If a device to be connected is [Smartphone],

the password is not displayed. Select SSID

to connect. (→229)

259 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

Connecting quickly with the same settings as used previously

([Select a destination from History] / [Select a destination from

Favorite])

The camera keeps a History of times you used the Wi-Fi function. You can register items

in the History to Favorite.

You can easily connect with the same settings as used previously by connecting from

History or Favorite.

• If the Wi-Fi settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be

possible to connect to the device.

1Set the menu (→45)

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

[Select a destination from History] Connects using the same settings as used previously.

[Select a destination from Favorite] Connects using settings registered in Favorite.

2Select the desired connection setting

Registering History items to Favorite

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [Select a destination from History]

1Select the item you wish to register and press

2Enter a registration name

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” (→52)

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character will be treated as two characters.

260 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

About connections

Editing items registered in Favorite

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Function]

→ [Select a destination from Favorite]

1Select the Favorite item you wish to edit and press

[Remove from Favorite] —

[Change the Order in Favorite] Select the destination.

[Change the Registered Name]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering

Text” (→52)

• Up to 30 characters can be entered. A double-byte character

will be treated as two characters.

Registering and saving frequently used Wi-Fi connection settings to

Favorites (→259)

The number of settings that can be saved in the history is limited.

Checking connection details of History or Favorite

When selecting History or Favorite items, you can view connection details by pressing the [DISP.]

button.

●Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] deletes content registered in History and Favorite.

●If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless access point

other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change the

Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the access point to be used is set to the

camera.

You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (→229, 239)

●When using [Select a destination from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite] to connect to

a network to which many PCs are connected, it may be difficult to make the connection because

the camera searches for previously connected equipment out of a large number of equipment

pieces. If you cannot connect, retry the connection using [New Connection].

261 DVQP1285

Wi-Fi

[Wi-Fi Setup]

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.

[Wi-Fi Setup] cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.

→ [Setup] → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Setup]

[Wi-Fi Password]

You can improve security

by enabling password entry

for a direct connection to a

smartphone.

[ON]: Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and

password. (→230)

[OFF]: Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID.

(→229)

• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by

scanning a QR code. (→230)

[LUMIX CLUB] Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID. (→251)

[PC Connection]

You can set the workgroup.

You must connect to the same workgroup as the destination

computer when sending pictures to the computer.

(The default is set to “WORKGROUP”)

[Change Workgroup Name]:

Enter the workgroup of the connecting computer.

[Restore to Default]:

Returns settings to default settings.

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→52)

• To use with a computer of the standard settings, you do not have

to change the workgroup.

[Device Name]

You can change the name

(SSID) of this unit.

Press [DISP.] button

Enter the desired device name (Up to 32 characters can be

entered)

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→52)

[Wi-Fi Function Lock]

To prevent incorrect operation

or use of the Wi-Fi function

by a third party and to protect

saved personal information,

it is recommended that you

protect the Wi-Fi function with

a password.

Setting a password will automatically display the password input

screen when the Wi-Fi function is used.

[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.

[Cancel]

• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”

(→52)

• Make a copy of password. If you forget the password, you can

reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu, however

other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Network Address]

Displays the MAC address and

IP address of this unit.

• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify

network equipment.

• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to

a network such as the Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes

are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a

wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)

[Approved Regulations] The authentication number is displayed.

262 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Viewing 4K motion pictures

■Viewing on TV screen

When you connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV and play

back a motion picture recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K],

you can enjoy high-resolution 4K motion pictures. Although

resolution output will be lower, you can also play back 4K

motion pictures by connecting to a high-definition TV and

other devices that do not have 4K support.

Preparations

• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (→201) to [AUTO] or [4K].

• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [Auto].

Connect this unit to a 4K-compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable and display the

playback screen (→264)

• When the [VIERA Link] setting on the camera is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to

a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television (VIERA), the television automatically

switches its input and the playback screen is displayed. For details (→266).

• When you have motion pictures recorded with [Rec Format] set to

[MP4] and their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality], you can also play

them back by inserting the card into the SD card slot of a TV that

supports motion pictures in 4K.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

■Viewing 4K motion pictures on a PC screen

To play back motion pictures recorded with [Rec Quality] of [4K] on a

PC, use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→268).

• To play back and edit 4K motion pictures, a high-performance PC

environment is required.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

(PDF).

263 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Enjoying 4K motion pictures

Storing 4K motion pictures

You cannot transfer or copy motion pictures recorded in [Rec Quality] with [4K] to a

Blu-ray disc or DVD using a Panasonic recorder. (Current as of May 2017)

■Storing 4K motion pictures on your PC

For details, refer to (→267).

You can use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (→268) to convert the file size of a motion

picture to a smaller size or copy it to a DVD.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

264 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

You can view pictures on a TV screen by connecting your camera to your TV with the

HDMI micro cable.

Preparation

Turn off both camera and TV.

1Connect camera to TV

Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong

direction, the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation.) Also, do not

insert into the wrong socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

HDMI micro cable

Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.

Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

[HDMI] socket

To HDMI video/audio input socket

2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input source to match the

connection socket

3Turn on the camera and press [ ] (Playback) button

265 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

●Bars may appear at the sides or at the top and bottom of the screen, depending on the aspect

ratio setting.

●Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.

●Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (→201)

●Pictures are not displayed on the camera screen.

●HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected simultaneously.

●Read the operating instructions for the TV.

The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card

slot

●Proper playback (aspect ratio) will be dependent on the TV used for viewing.

●The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV model.

●You may not be able to play back panorama pictures. Also you cannot perform automatic scrolling

playback of panorama pictures.

●For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

266 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Viewing on TV screen

VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)

What is VIERA Link (HDMI)?

●VIERA Link is a function that automatically links this camera to VIERA Link-

compatible devices by connecting HDMI micro cables for enabling easy operation

with the VIERA remote control. (Some operations are not available.)

●VIERA Link (HDMI) is an exclusive Panasonic function added to the industry-

standard HDMI control functions known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics

Control). Operation is not guaranteed when connecting with non-Panasonic HDMI

CEC-compatible devices. Refer to your product manual to verify compatibility with

VIERA Link (HDMI).

●This camera supports VIERA Link (HDMI) Version 5. This is the Panasonic standard

that also supports previous Panasonic VIERA Link devices.

Preparation

Set [VIERA Link] to [ON] (→201).

1Connect the camera to a VIERA Link (HDMI)-compatible Panasonic television

(VIERA) with an HDMI micro cable (→264)

2Turn on the camera and press [ ] (Playback) button

3Operate with the remote control for the TV

Turning the unit OFF

• The camera can also be turned off when the television is turned off with the remote

control.

Automatic input select

• When the camera and TV are connected by HDMI micro cable, the camera is

turned ON, and the camera’s [ ] (Playback) button is pressed, the television input

automatically switches to the camera’s screen. The television can also be switched on

via the camera from Standby Mode (if “Power on link” on the television is set to “on”).

●Operations via the camera buttons will be limited.

●To play back the audio of the motion pictures in a slide show, set the [Sound] in the Slide Show

setting screen to [AUTO] or [Audio].

●Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.

Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D-Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

●If VIERA Link (HDMI) does not function correctly (→292)

267 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures

on your PC

Still/motion pictures can be copied from the camera to your computer by connecting the

two together.

• Some computers can read directly from the camera’s memory card.

For details, see the instruction manual for your computer.

■Computer specifications

You can connect the camera to a computer that can detect a mass storage device (device

that stores a large volume of data).

• Windows: Windows 10 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 8 / Windows 7

• Mac: OS X v10.5 - v10.12

Some motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] may not be scanned correctly by

copying a file or folder

●When using Windows, be sure to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268) to copy motion

pictures recorded in [AVCHD].

●When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”. Note, however,

that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture quality settings.

(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)

268 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Downloading software

If you wish to play back or edit pictures on a PC, download software from the supplier’s

website and install it on your PC.

PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.9 PE

You can capture still pictures or motion pictures to your PC, or organize captured pictures

by categorizing by recording date, model name of the digital camera used to record, etc.

You can also correct still pictures, edit motion pictures, or write to DVD.

Check the website below to download/install the software.

The software is available for download until the end of May 2022.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs99pe.html

•Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows® 10 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows® 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows® 8 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit) SP1

CPU Pentium® 4 2.8 GHz or higher

Display 1024×768 pixels or more (1920×1080 pixels or more recommended)

RAM 1 GB or more (32-bit) / 2 GB or more (64-bit)

Free hard disk

space 450 MB or more for installing software

• To support 4K motion pictures, you need the 64-bit versions of Windows 10,

Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7.

• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac.

• For further information on the operating environment required for functions involving

4K motion pictures such as playback and editing, refer to the operating instructions

for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF file).

269 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE

This software develops and edits RAW file pictures. Edited pictures can be saved in a file

format such as JPEG or TIFF that can be displayed on a PC, etc.

Check the website below to download/install the software.

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/

•Operating environment

Supported OS

Windows® 10

Windows® 8.1

Windows® 8

Windows® 7

Mac OS X v10.6 - v10.12

• For details on the operating environment and how to use the SILKYPIX Developer

Studio, refer to the “Help” or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support website.

LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version

(Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 / 7)

Motion pictures can be edited easily.

Check the website below to download/install the software.

http://loilo.tv/product/20

• For more information on how to use LoiLoScope and its operating environment, read

the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the website.

• “LoiLoScope” is not compatible with Mac.

●To download the software, the PC must be connected to the Internet.

●It may take time to download the software in some communication environments.

270 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

Copying still pictures and motion pictures

Preparations

• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on your computer before starting the copying procedure. (→268)

• Turn on the camera and computer.

1Connect camera to computer

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation.) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

[Access]

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) while [Access] is displayed.

[USB/CHARGE] socket

USB connection cable (supplied)

2Use to select [PC] and press [MENU/SET]

• If you set the [USB Mode] (→200) to [PC] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be

automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.

3Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to copy pictures to your computer

• Do not delete or move copied files and folders using Windows Explorer or other browsers.

Otherwise, you will not be able to play back or edit the files using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

271 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures on your PC

■Copying to your computer without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

You can save pictures to use on your computer by dragging and dropping folders and

files into separate folders on your computer.

•The card of this unit contains the following files (folder structure).

●Windows

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed in “Computer”.

●Mac

Drive (“LUMIX”) is

displayed on the desktop.

DCIM (Still/motion pictures)

100_PANA (Up to 999 pictures/folder)

Folder number

P1000001.JPG*1

File number

P1000999.JPG

101_PANA

999_PANA

MISC (DPOF files, Favorite)

PRIVATE

AVCHD (Motion pictures in AVCHD)

Card

*1 .JPG : Still pictures

.RW2 : Still pictures recorded in RAW file

.MP4 : [MP4] Motion Pictures

*2 New folders are created in the following cases:

• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder.

• When using cards already containing the same folder number (for example, pictures taken with

other cameras, etc.).

• When recording after performing [No.Reset]. (→202)

●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

●When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Remove the

USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

272 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Storing recorded still pictures and motion pictures in

the recorder

If you insert a card that has pictures recorded with this camera into

a Panasonic recorder, you can dub the content to a Blu-ray Disc or

DVD etc.

• The method of importing still pictures and motion pictures recorded

in this unit to other devices will vary depending on the file format

(JPEG, RAW, AVCHD, or MP4).

• See the instruction manual for the recorder for details for copying and playing back.

273 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Printing

You can connect directly to a PictBridge-compatible printer for printing.

Preparations

• Adjust the print quality or other settings on your printer, as needed.

• Turn on the camera and printer.

1Connect camera to printer

• Check the plug direction and insert it straight in. (If the cable is inserted in the wrong direction,

the plug could become deformed and cause faulty operation.) Also, do not insert into the wrong

socket. Doing so may cause damage to this unit.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

[ ]

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) when the cable disconnection icon

[ ] is displayed (may not be displayed with some printers).

[USB/CHARGE] socket

USB connection cable (supplied)

2Use to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and press [MENU/SET]

3Use to select a picture and press [MENU/SET]

4Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→275))

274 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Printing

Printing multiple pictures

Multiple pictures are printed at one time.

1Press to select [Multi Print] in step 3 of “Printing” (→273)

2Use to select the item and press [MENU/SET]

[Multi Select] Scroll between pictures with , select pictures to print with

[MENU/SET] (Press [MENU/SET] again to release selection.)

Use to select [OK], and press [MENU/SET]

[Select All]Print all pictures.

[Print Set (DPOF)] Print pictures selected in [Print Set]. (→221)

[Favorite] Print pictures selected as [Favorite]. (→220)

3Use to select [Print start] and press [MENU/SET]

(Print settings (→275))

●The group pictures are displayed one by one instead of all pictures at the same time.

●Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional).

When the battery begins to run out during communication, a warning beep sounds. Cancel printing

and disconnect USB connection cable (supplied).

●Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection

cable.

●Some printers can print directly from the camera’s memory card. For details, see the manual for

your printer.

●An orange “●” displayed during printing indicates an error message.

●Print may be divided into several pictures if printing a large amount of pictures. (Remaining sheets

display may differ from the number of pictures set for printing.)

●Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and pictures recorded with [Post Focus] cannot be printed.

●Still pictures recorded in a RAW file cannot be printed. (The still pictures recorded in JPEG file

format at the same time as the RAW file can be printed.)

275 DVQP1285

Connecting with other devices

Printing

■Making print settings on the camera

Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before

selecting [Print start].

[Print with Date] [ON] / [OFF]

[Num.of prints] Sets number of pictures (up to 999 pictures).

[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.

[Page Layout] Sets whether or not to add borders and how many pictures to be printed on

each sheet of paper.

●If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.

●When setting [Print with Date] to [ON], check the date printing settings on the printer (printer

settings may be prioritized).

●Items may not be displayed if incompatible with printer.

●To print to paper sizes/layouts not supported by this camera, set to [ ] and make settings on the

printer. (Consult your printer’s operating manual.)

●Even with completed [Print Set] settings, dates may not be printed, depending on the shop or

printer used.

Printing with date and text

Time and date can be set to be printed on the picture when taking the picture by

activating the [Text Stamp] function in the [Playback] menu. (→216)

■Printing date without [Text Stamp]

Printing in store:

Only recording date can be printed. Request date printing in store.

• Making [Print Set] (→221) settings on the camera in advance allows settings for

numbers of copies and date printing to be designated before giving the card to the

store.

• You cannot request a store to print the characters entered for [Age] or [Name] of [Profile

Setup] or [Face Recog.], [Travel Date], [Location], and [Title Edit].

Using computer:

Print settings for recording date and text information can be made using

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268).

Using printer:

Recording date can be printed by setting [Print Set] on the camera, or by setting [Print

with Date] (→275) to [ON] when connecting to a printer compatible with date printing.

276 DVQP1285

Others

Optional accessories

AC adaptor (optional) / DC coupler (optional)

By using the AC adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC coupler (DMW-DCC11: optional),

you can record and play back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.

The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor.

●Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).

●Also read the AC adaptor and DC coupler operating instructions.

277 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (monitor

style) in the monitor.

• The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are

only for the purpose of reference.

In recording

Recording mode (→37)

Custom Set (→88)

[Photo Style] (→169)

Flash Mode (→146)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→151)

[Snap Movie] (→158)

[Aspect Ratio] (→172)/

[Picture Size] (→173)

Image size (Panorama Shot

Mode) (→72)

Picture effect (Filter)

adjustment display (→82, 171)

EXPS Types of picture effects (Filter)

(→171)

Card (displayed only during

recording) (→27)

XXhXXmXXs Elapsed recording time*1

(→149)

Simultaneous recording

indicator (→157)

Automatic switching between

viewfinder and monitor (→34)

[Peaking] (→190)

[HDR] (→176)/[iHDR] (→56)

Electronic shutter (→177)

Overheat indicator (→287)

60p

278 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

[Quality] (→173)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→86)

AFS AFF AFC MF

[AFS/AFF/AFC] (→91)/

MF (→104)

[AF Mode] (→92)

[Pull Focus] (→160)

[Face Recog.] (→180)

AFL AF Lock (→106)

Burst (→130)

[4K PHOTO] (→114)

[Post Focus] (→124)

[Self Timer] (→132)

Remaining battery (→24)

Macro recording (→103)

[Level Shot] (→184)

[Stabilizer] (→140)

Jitter alert (→140)

Recording state (Flashes red.)

(→149)/

Focus (Lights green.) (→36)

Focus (Under low illumination)

(→90)

Wi-Fi connection status

Histogram (→190)

Name*2 (→183)

Travel elapsed days*3 (→197)

Age in years/months*2 (→183)

Location*3 (→197)

Current date/time*3

Travel destination setting*3: (→196)

Exposure meter (→193)

Zoom (→144)

AF area (→90, 98)

Spot metering target (→174)

[Center Marker] (→191)

[Self Timer] (→132)

[Zoom Mic] (→185)

[Silent Mode] (→186)

AEL AE Lock (→106)

[Metering Mode] (→44, 174)

Program Shift (→66)

3.3 Aperture value (→36)

60 Shutter speed (→36)

Exposure compensation

(→107)

Exposure Bracket (→134)

Brightness (exposure)

(→57, 84)

Manual Exposure Assist (→69)

ISO sensitivity (→108)

279 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Function buttons (→49)

(→57)

(→84)

(→87)

Coloring (→57)

Defocus control function

(→57, 84)

Brightness (exposure)

(→57, 84)

Type of defocus ([Miniature

Effect]) (→80)

[One Point Color] (→81)

[Sunshine] (→81)

Picture effect (Filter)

adjustment display

(→82, 171)

Picture effects ON or OFF

(→171)

Picture effects (Filter)

(→171)

Aperture value (→87)

Shutter speed (→87)

ISO sensitivity (→87)

[Dial Guide] (→193)

White Balance Bracket (→113)

White Balance Fine Adjustment

(→112)

White Balance (→110)

Coloring (→56)

98 Number of recordable pictures

(→28)

RXXmXXs Available recording time*1

(→29)

Touch tab (→195)

Touch zoom (→145)

Touch Shutter (→43)

[Touch AE] (→44)

[Peaking] (→190)

Self Shot Mode (→59)

*1 [h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.

*2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup] setting is

set.

*3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock and after

switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.

280 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

In playback

Playback Mode (→206)

Protected picture (→222)

Number of prints (→221)

With location information

(→207, 236)

Favorites (→220)

Cable disconnect prohibit icon

(→273)

Motion picture playback

(→162)

Panorama picture playback

(→74)

Continuous playback of burst

picture group (→166)

Save pictures from the 4K

burst file (→117)

Save a picture from pictures

recorded using [Post Focus]

(→126)

Continuous playback of Time

Lapse Shot picture group

(→166)

Continuous playback of stop

motion animation group

(→166)

Text stamped display (→216)

XXhXXmXXs Elapsed playback time*1

Icon indicating the presence of

a marker (→118, 119)

After Beauty Retouch (→208)

4K Photo (4K burst file) (→114)

[Post Focus] (→124)

[Focus Stacking] (→127)

[Aspect Ratio] (→172)/

[Picture Size] (→173)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→151)

[Snap Movie] (→158)

[Quality] (→173)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→86)

Remaining battery (→24)

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

Wi-Fi connection status

15 pic. Number of group pictures

XXhXXmXXs Motion picture recording time*1

(→162)

15 pic.15 pic.

1ST DAY

11 months 20 days

281 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Clear Retouch completed icon

(→214)

Acquiring information icon

Playback (Motion Pictures)

(→162)

1ST DAY Travel elapsed days (→197)

Upload (Wi-Fi) icon (→249)

Burst Picture Group Display

(→166)

[Time Lapse Shot] Picture

Group Display (→166)

Display for the Stop Motion

Animation Group (→166)

Submenu icon (→249)

[Silent Mode] (→186)

11 months 20 days

Age in years/months

(→181, 183)

Multi Playback (→164)

Delete (→167)

Name*2 (→181, 183)

Location*2 (→197)

Title*2 (→215)

Recording information

*1 [h], [m] and [s] indicate “hour”, “minute” and “second”.

*2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face Recog.]).

282 DVQP1285

Others

List of monitor/viewfinder displays

Histogram (→41)

Recording information

1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

100-0001 Folder/File number (→271)

■Histogram display

100-00011/98

Recording information

[Stabilizer] (→140)

[i.Dynamic] (→175)

[HDR] (→176)/[iHDR] (→56)

[i.Resolution] (→175)

Recording date/time

World time (→196)

[Aspect Ratio] (→172)/

[Picture Size] (→173)

60p

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

(→151)

240fps 120fps

[High Speed Video] (→86)

[Quality] (→173)

4K Photo (4K burst file) (→114)

[Post Focus] (→124)

[Focus Stacking] (→127)

100-0001 Folder/File number (→271)

■Detailed information display

100-0001

AM10:00 DEC. 1.2017

283 DVQP1285

Others

Message displays

The following explains the meaning of major messages displayed on the screen, and how

to respond to them.

■Memory cards

[Memory Card Error] / [Format this card?]

• Save needed data on a computer or other device, and then use [Format] on the camera. (→28)

• Try with a different card.

[Read Error] / [Write Error] / [Please check the card]

• Check whether card has been inserted correctly (→26).

• Turn off the camera and remove the card. Reinsert the card and turn the camera on again.

• Try with a different card.

[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. 4K photo recording requires a card that meets a particular speed class rating. Use a card

that meets the rating. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to

“About motion picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→27).

• If recording stops even when using a card of the recommended speed class (→27), the data writing

speed has dropped. If this happens, we recommend backing up the data on the memory card and

formatting it (→28). Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.

[Memory Card Error] / [This memory card cannot be used]

• Use a compatible card. (→27)

■Battery

[This battery cannot be used]

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Center if display still

remains.

• Wipe any dirt away from the battery terminal.

284 DVQP1285

Others

Message displays

■Wi-Fi function

[Failed to connect wireless access point] / [Connection failed] / [No destination found]

• The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong. Check the authentication type,

encryption type, and encryption key. (→256)

• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point. Check other

devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the 2.4 GHz band.

[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.] / [Network disconnected. Transfer stopped.]

• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak. Perform the connection closer to the

wireless access point.

• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after

specific time has passed. Reconnect the connection again.

[Connection failed]

• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.

[Cannot connect to server]

• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root certificate.

■Others

[Some pictures cannot be deleted] / [This picture cannot be deleted]

• Non-DCF pictures (→161) cannot be deleted. Save needed data on a computer or other device,

and then use [Format] on the camera. (→28)

[Cannot be set on this picture]

• [Print Set], [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], and other functions cannot be used for pictures that are not

compliant with the DCF standard (→161).

[Please turn camera off and then on again] / [System Error]

• Turn the camera on again. (Consult the dealer or your nearest Service Center if display still

remains.)

285 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Try checking these items (→285 - 293) first.

If the problem persists,

Performing [Reset] in the [Setup] menu may resolve the issue (→203).

Also, see the Panasonic support site for the latest support information.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This site is available in English only.)

■Battery, power

The charging lamp blinks.

• Charging is being performed in a place with extremely high or low temperature.

→Reconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and retry charging in a place where ambient

temperature is 10 °C to 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F) (temperature conditions also apply to the battery

itself).

• Charging is not possible if the power supply capacity of the computer is low.

Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on. Camera switches off as soon as the

camera is turned on.

• Battery needs recharging.

→Charge the battery. (→20)

This unit is turned off automatically.

• [Economy] is activated. (→200)

The battery runs down quickly.

• [4K PHOTO] is set to [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]).

→When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) has been selected, the battery drains faster.

Select [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst]) only when recording.

• The Wi-Fi connection has been on for a long time.

→The battery is used up faster with a Wi-Fi connection. Turn off the camera as often as possible

using [Economy] (→200) or other methods.

286 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Recording

Cannot record pictures. The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is

pressed.

• When [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], the camera will not record until proper focusing is

achieved. (→188)

Recorded pictures look white.

• Lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.).

→Turn the camera on to extract lens barrel, and clean lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.

Recorded pictures are too bright/too dark.

• AE Lock (→106) is set inappropriately.

Some pictures are taken when I press the shutter button just once.

• Cancel the following settings:

– [Simultaneous record w/o filter] (→172)

– Drive Mode (→129)

– Bracket recording (→133)

Focus not aligned correctly.

• Subject outside of focus range.

• [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [RELEASE]. (→188)

• [Shutter AF] is set to [OFF]. (→187)

• AF Lock (→106) is set inappropriately.

• If there are fingerprints or dirt on the lens, the focus may be set to the lens and not the subject.

Recorded pictures are blurred. The stabilizer function ineffective.

• Shutter speed is slower in dark locations and the stabilizer function is less effective.

→Use a tripod and the self-timer (→132) when using a slower shutter speed.

Recorded pictures appear coarse, or there is interference.

• We recommend trying the following methods.

→Lower ISO sensitivity (→108).

→Either adjust [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to a higher setting or set each item other than

[Noise Reduction] to a lower setting. (→170)

Subject appears skewed in pictures.

• If you take a picture of a moving subject in the electronic shutter mode, motion picture recording

mode, or 4K photo recording mode, the subject in the picture may be skewed in some cases.

This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a

malfunction.

287 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and LED lighting

fixture.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup

sensors. This is not a malfunction.

• If you are taking still pictures using the electronic shutter, the striping may be

reduced by setting a slower shutter speed. (→68)

• When noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a fluorescent

or LED lighting fixture in the motion picture recording mode, you can reduce

the flicker or striping by setting up [Flkr Decrease] (→185) and fixing the

shutter speed. It is possible to select a shutter speed from [1/50], [1/60],

[1/100], or [1/120]. You can set the shutter speed manually in the Creative

Video Mode. (→85)

Brightness or coloring of recorded picture different from real life.

• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture etc., increasing the shutter speed may

introduce slight changes to brightness and color. These are a result of the characteristics of the

light source and do not indicate a malfunction.

• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting, LED

lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting etc., the colors and screen brightness may change or

horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

4K photo recording stops before finishing.

• When the ambient temperature is high or recording of the 4K Photo function is performed

continuously, the camera may display [ ] and stop the recording. Wait until the camera cools

down.

288 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Motion Picture

Cannot record motion pictures.

• When a large capacity card is used, you may not be able to take a picture for a while after you turn

on the camera.

Motion picture recording stops midway.

• When the ambient temperature is high or motion picture is recorded continuously, the camera may

display [ ] and stop the recording. Wait until the camera cools down.

• The speed class of a required card varies depending on [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion

picture. Be sure to use a card of the recommended speed class. For details, refer to “About motion

picture/4K photo recording and speed class ratings” (→27).

Sometimes focus adjustment with Auto Focus mode is difficult while recording 4K motion

pictures.

• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the Auto Focus speed in order to adjust the

focus at high precision. This is not a malfunction.

A noise, such as a clicking or buzzing noise, is recorded on a motion picture. Audio is

recorded at low volumes.

• With recording in a quiet environment, the sound of aperture, focus and other actions may be

recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction. The focus operation during recording of

motion pictures can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] (→153).

• If you block the microphone with your fingers while motion pictures are being recorded, the audio

may be recorded at a low volume or may not be recorded at all. In this case, the camera may pick

up the lens operating sounds more easily.

Operating sounds are recorded in a motion picture.

• Use of [Silent Operation] is recommended if you are concerned about operational sounds. (→87)

■Flash

No flash emitted.

• The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.

– Flash set to [ ] (Forced Flash Off). (→146, 147)

• Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [MSHTR]. (→177)

• Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF]. (→186)

289 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Monitor/viewfinder

The monitor/viewfinder is turned off although the camera is turned on.

• If no operations are performed during the set time period [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (→200) is

activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.

• When a hand or an object is close to the eye sensor, the monitor display mode could be switched

to viewfinder display mode. (→34)

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change significantly for an

instant.

• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or

when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.

Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder when pressing [LVF] button.

• When you open the monitor, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and the [LVF]

button and eye sensor are disabled.

• When it is connected to a computer or printer, the camera can display pictures on the monitor only.

■Playback

Cannot view pictures. There are no recorded pictures.

• A card is not inserted in the camera.

• Has the file name of the picture been changed on a computer? If so, it cannot be played back on

the camera.

→It is recommended to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software (→268) to write pictures from PC

to card.

• Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (→206)

Red areas in pictures appear blackened.

• When the digital red-eye correction ([ ], [ ], [ ]) is operating, red areas may be

blackened.

→We recommend setting the flash mode to [ ]/[ ] or [Red-Eye Removal] to [OFF] before

recording. (→178)

290 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Wi-Fi function

A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get disconnected. Wireless access

point is not displayed.

General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection

• Use within the communication range of the wireless LAN network.

• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency

operated nearby?

→Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away from

the device.

• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or the

connection may be disrupted. (A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• When this unit is placed on a metal table or shelf, the connection may not be established easily.

Use the camera away from metal surfaces.

About a wireless access point

• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.

• Check the radio wave condition of the wireless access point.

→Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

→Move the location or change the angle of the wireless access point.

• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access

point.

→Turn off the wireless access point and then turn it back on.

• Is the network SSID of the wireless access point set not to broadcast?

→It may not be detected when it is set not to broadcast. Enter and set the network SSID. (→256)

Alternatively, set the network SSID of the wireless access point to broadcast.

This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.

• Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone.

I am having a problem connecting to my Windows 8 PC. The user name and password are not

recognized.

• Depending on the OS version, on Windows 8, for example, there are two types of user account

(local account/Microsoft account).

→Be sure to set the local account and use the user name and password for the local account.

291 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

The Wi-Fi connection is not recognizing my PC.

The camera cannot be connected to Mac computer/Windows PC via Wi-Fi connection.

• By default, the Wi-Fi connection uses the default workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”. If the name

of the workgroup has been changed, it will not be recognized.

→Select [PC Connection] then [Change Workgroup Name] in the [Wi-Fi Setup] to change the

workgroup name to match that of your PC. (→261)

• Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.

• When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely

from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.

→Please confirm clock set and world time of the camera matches with time, date and time zone in

Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely, please match them.

Images cannot be transmitted to the WEB service.

• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.

It takes time to transmit an image to the WEB service.

Transmission of the image fails midway. There is an image that could not be transmitted.

• Is the size of the image too large?

→Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (→217).

→Reduce the image size at [Size] (→241), and then send.

• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.

→Transmit closer to the wireless access point.

• File format of the picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (→239)

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

→Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (→203)

However, the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] will be reset.

292 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■TV, computer, printer

No image appears on TV. Image blurred or not colored.

• Not connected correctly (→264).

• The television has not been switched to auxiliary input.

VIERA Link (HDMI) is not working.

• Is the camera’s [VIERA Link] setting set to [ON]? (→201)

→Check the VIERA Link (HDMI) settings on the device you are connecting to.

→Turn the camera off and on again.

Cannot communicate with the computer.

• Set [USB Mode] to [PC] (→200, 270).

• Turn the camera off and then on again.

Computer does not recognize card. (When using an SDXC Memory Card)

• Check whether your computer is compatible with SDXC Memory Cards.

• A message prompting you to format the card may appear when you connect it. Do not format the

card.

• If the [Access] indicator on the screen does not go off, turn the camera off before disconnecting the

USB connection cable.

Cannot print when connecting to printer.

• Printer not compatible with PictBridge.

• Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)] (→200, 273).

The edges of pictures are cut off when printing.

• Release any trimming or edgeless printing settings on printer before printing.

• The aspect ratio of pictures is different from that of paper used for printing.

→If printing in shop, check if 16:9 sizes can be printed.

293 DVQP1285

Others

Q&A Troubleshooting

■Others

The lens makes a clicking noise.

• When the camera is turned on or off, the lens is moved, or an aperture operation is performed,

such a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

• When the brightness changes after a zooming operation or moving the camera, the lens may make

a noise while adjusting the aperture. This is not a malfunction.

Zooming stops instantaneously.

• When using the Extended optical zoom, the zooming action will stop temporarily. This is not a

malfunction.

Red lamp illuminated when pressing shutter button halfway in dark locations.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is set to [ON] (→188).

Camera is hot.

• Camera may become a little warm during use, but this does not affect performance or quality.

Clock is incorrect.

• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.

→Reset the clock (→31).

When using zoom, picture becomes slightly warped and the edges of the subject become

colored.

• Pictures may be slightly warped or colored around the edges, depending on the zoom ratio, but this

is not a fault.

294 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

When in use

●Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may

be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely

affecting the pictures and/or sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic

fields created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures

and/or sound.

• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning

properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then

reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/

or sound may be adversely affected.

●Do not extend the supplied cord or cable.

●Do not allow camera to come into contact with pesticides or volatile substances (can

cause surface damage or coating to peel).

●Keep credit cards and other items sensitive to

magnetism away from the magnetic portion of the

camera. Otherwise, magnetic fields may damage their

data and make them unusable.

Magnet

●Never leave the camera and the battery in a car or on a car hood in the summer.

Doing so may cause leakage of the battery electrolyte, overheating, fire or a battery

explosion due to the high temperature.

295 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Caring for your camera

To clean your camera, remove the battery, the DC coupler (optional) or a card, or

disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

●Use a damp cloth to remove stubborn stains, before wiping with a dry cloth.

●Do not use benzine, thinners, alcohol, or kitchen detergent, as these may damage the

outer casing and finish of the camera.

●If using a chemically-treated cloth, read the supplied instructions carefully.

●Do not touch the lens barrier.

Lens barrier

When not using for a while

●Turn off the camera before removing battery and card (ensure that battery is removed

to prevent damage through over-discharge).

●Do not leave in contact with rubber or plastic bags.

●Store together with a drying agent (silica gel) if leaving in drawer, etc. Store batteries in

cool (15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)) places with low humidity (40%RH to 60%RH) and

no major temperature changes.

●Charge battery once per year and use completely before storing again.

●Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a

long period of time.

Monitor/viewfinder

●Do not press hard on the monitor. This may cause uneven display and damage the

monitor.

●In cold climates or other situations when the camera becomes cold, the monitor or

the viewfinder may appear slightly darker than normal immediately after the camera is

turned on. Normal brightness will return once the internal components have warmed up.

The monitor and viewfinder are made with extremely high precision technology.

However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on the screen.

This is not a malfunction. The monitor and viewfinder screens are controlled with

extremely high precision, but some pixels may be inactive. The spots will not be

recorded on pictures on a card.

296 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Lens

●Do not press the lens with excessive force.

●Images may appear slightly white if lens is dirty (fingerprints, etc.). Turn the camera on,

hold the extracted lens barrel with your fingers, and gently wipe the lens surface with a

soft, dry cloth.

●Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may

cause it to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a

window.

●Do not touch the lens barrier, as this may damage the lens. Be careful when removing

camera from bag, etc.

Battery

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.

This battery is easily affected by temperature and humidity, and is affected more when the

temperature is high or low.

●Remove battery from camera after use.

• Keep the battery in a plastic bag, making sure that it is kept away from metallic

objects (such as clips) when carrying or storing it.

●The time required for charging varies depending on conditions of battery usage.

Charging takes longer at high or low temperatures and when the battery has not been

used in some time.

●Battery will be warm during charging and for some time thereafter.

●Battery will run out if not used for long periods of time, even after being charged.

●Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the

resulting heat generated.

●Frequently charging up battery is not recommended.

(Frequently charging battery reduces maximum usage time and can cause battery to

expand.)

●If available battery power is significantly reduced, battery is reaching end of lifespan.

Please purchase a new battery.

●When charging:

• Wipe dirt from the battery terminal with a dry cloth.

• Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●Do not use a damaged or dented battery (especially connectors), e.g. by dropping (can

cause faults).

297 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

AC adaptor (supplied)

●Keep at least 1 m (3.3 feet) away from AM radio (may cause radio interference).

●The AC adaptor (supplied) may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is

not a malfunction.

●After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A

very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)

Memory cards

●To prevent damage to cards and data

• Avoid high temperatures, direct sunlight, electromagnetic waves, and static electricity.

• Do not bend, drop, or expose to strong impacts.

• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or

carrying the card.

• Do not touch terminals on reverse of card or allow them to become dirty or wet.

●Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate

handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded

data.

●When disposing of/transferring memory cards

• If using the “format” or “delete” functions on your camera or computer, this only

changes the file management information, and does not completely delete the data

from within the memory card. When disposing of or transferring your memory cards,

we recommend physically destroying them, or using commercially available computer

data erasing software to completely delete the data from the card. Data within

memory cards should be managed responsibly.

When using a tripod or unipod

●Do not apply excessive force or tighten screws when they are crooked. (This may

damage the camera, screw hole, or label.)

●Ensure that the tripod is stable. (Refer to the tripod instructions.)

●You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.

298 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Personal Information

To protect personal information, we recommend that you set a Wi-Fi password or a Wi-Fi

function lock. (→261)

If names or birthdays are set in [Profile Setup] or in the [Face Recog.] function, keep in

mind that the camera and recorded pictures will contain personal information.

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject and

take your own responsibility when you use the [Silent Mode], or use functions such

as writing the location information and changing the shutter noise, etc.

●Disclaimer

• Data containing personal information can be altered or lost due to malfunction, static

electricity, accidents, breakdowns, repairs, or other operations.

Panasonic will not be liable for any damage that occurs, direct or indirect, as a result

of the alteration or loss of data containing personal information.

●When ordering repairs or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After you make a note of the personal information, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/

[Delete account] to delete data containing personal information such as wireless LAN

connection settings that you registered or set in this unit. (→203, 254)

• To protect your personal information, please reset the settings. (→203)

• Remove the memory card from the camera.

• When ordering repairs, settings may be returned to the initial purchase state.

• If the above operations cannot be performed because of a camera malfunction,

consult with the dealer or nearest Service Center.

●When transferring or disposing of your memory card, see “When disposing of/

transferring memory cards” in the previous section. (→297)

●Uploading pictures to WEB services

• Pictures may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such

as titles, recording dates and times, and location information. Before uploading the

pictures to WEB services, check the pictures carefully for information that should not

be disclosed.

299 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

Wi-Fi function

■Use the camera as a wireless LAN device

When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than

wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs

and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any

damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN

device.

■Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where

this camera is sold

There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries

other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any

violations.

■There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted by a third party. We strongly recommend that you enable encryption in the

settings of your wireless access point to ensure information security.

■Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference

• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,

such as near microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach the camera.

• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones

that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both

devices.

■Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use

When the camera utilizes its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched

automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorized to use

(SSID*) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be

considered as unauthorized access.

* SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If the

SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

300 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

●SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

●The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other

countries.

●HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

●“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of

Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

●Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

●Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

●Windows is either registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

●iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

●App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

●Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

●The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●“Wi-Fi®” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

●DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification

marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

●QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

●This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a registered

trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

●Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions are

trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.

301 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a consumer

or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with

the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer

engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC

Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be

obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com

302 DVQP1285

Others

Usage cautions and notes

This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,

(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation, and/or

(3) open source software

The software categorized as (3) is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Please refer to the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting

[MENU/SET] → [Setup] → [Version Disp.] → [Software info].

Panasonic DC ZS70 DMC Owner’s Manual For Advanced Features Adv En Om

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation